Lincoln 2004 Ls Owners Manual Ford

2015-10-23

: Lincoln Lincoln-2004-Lincoln-Lincoln-Ls-Owners-Manual-817524 lincoln-2004-lincoln-lincoln-ls-owners-manual-817524 lincoln pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 320 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
Entertainment Systems
Climate Controls
Lights
Driver Controls
Locks and Security
Seating and Safety Restraints
Driving
Roadside Emergencies
Customer Assistance
Cleaning
Maintenance and Specifications
Accessories
Index

Introduction 4

Instrument Cluster 10

Warning and control lights 10

Gauges 15

Entertainment Systems 17

AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD 17

AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 21

Navigation system 25

Climate Controls 90

Electronic automatic temperature control 90

Rear window defroster 97

Lights 98

Headlamps 98

Turn signal control 101

Bulb replacement 102

Driver Controls 107

Windshield wiper/washer control 107

Steering wheel adjustment 108

Power windows 111

Mirrors 112

Speed control 116

Message center 127

Locks and Security 142

Keys 142

Locks 142

Anti-theft system 146

Table of Contents

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Table of Contents

Seating and Safety Restraints 157

Seating 157

Safety restraints 164

Air bags 177

Child restraints 189

Driving 201

Starting 201

Brakes 204

Traction control/AdvanceTrac 207

Transmission operation 210

Vehicle loading 218

Trailer towing 222

Recreational towing 222

Roadside Emergencies 223

Getting roadside assistance 223

Hazard flasher switch 224

Fuel pump shut-off switch 224

Fuses and relays 225

Changing tires 235

Jump starting 240

Wrecker towing 246

Customer Assistance 247

Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 255

Cleaning 256

Table of Contents

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications 262

Engine compartment 264

Engine oil 266

Battery 269

Fuel information 277

Air filter(s) 288

Tire Information 292

Part numbers 304

Refill capacities 305

Lubricant specifications 306

Accessories 312

Index 314

including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval

system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written

authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without

notice and without incurring obligation.

Table of Contents

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and

certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known

to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

CONGRATULATIONS

Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to

get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The

more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the

safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.

For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the

following website:

•In the United States: www.ford.com

•In Canada: www.ford.ca

•In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx

•In Australia: www.ford.com.au

Additional owner information is given in separate publications.

This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available

and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your

particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe

options before they are generally available.

Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It

is an integral part of the vehicle.

Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the

safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the

engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.

collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump

shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Introduction

SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible

damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers

to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning

triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed.

Warning symbols on your vehicle

When you see this symbol, it is

imperative that you consult the

relevant section of this guide before

touching or attempting adjustment

of any kind.

Protecting the environment

We must all play our part in

protecting the environment. Correct

vehicle usage and the authorized

disposal of waste, cleaning and

lubrication materials are significant

steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this

guide with the tree symbol.

BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive

continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of

new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the

moving parts a chance to break in.

Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a

trailer.

Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during

the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these

additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the

Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil

usage.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Introduction

SPECIAL NOTICES

Emission warranty

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper

Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L

Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible

for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a

detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to

the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s

Guide.

Special instructions

For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic

controls.

Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)

in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow

the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.

Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should

NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.

Service Data Recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and

storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially

includes information about the performance or status of various systems

and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake

systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford

Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may

access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your

vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Introduction

Event Data Recording

Other modules in your vehicle —event data recorders —are capable of

collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The

recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.

The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the

occupants, potentially including information such as:

•how various systems in your vehicle were operating;

•whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;

•how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the

brake pedal;

•how fast the vehicle was traveling; and

•where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.

To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected

to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do

not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,

unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,

other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful

authority. Other parties may seek to access the information

independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.

MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION

For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with

features and options that are different from the ones that are described

in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that

complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided

supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations

and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this

Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Introduction

These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide

Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front

Air Bag-Side Child Seat

Child Seat Installation

Warning

Child Seat Lower

Anchor

Child Seat Tether

Anchor Brake System

Anti-Lock Brake System Brake Fluid -

Non-Petroleum Based

Traction Control AdvanceTrac娂

Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe

Windshield

Defrost/Demist

Rear Window

Defrost/Demist

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Power Windows

Front/Rear Power Window Lockout

Child Safety Door

Lock/Unlock

Interior Luggage

Compartment Release

Symbol

Panic Alarm Engine Oil

Engine Coolant Engine Coolant

Temperature

Do Not Open When Hot Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,

or Sparks Battery Acid

Explosive Gas Fan Warning

Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid

Level

MAX

MIN

Emission System Engine Air Filter

Passenger Compartment

Air Filter Jack

Check fuel cap Low tire warning

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Introduction

WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES

Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may

become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may

illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.

Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the

bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the

respective system inspected immediately.

Check engine: The Check Engine

indicator light illuminates when the

ignition is first turned to the ON

position to check the bulb. Solid

illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board

Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On

board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications

chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could

damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid

heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced

immediately.

Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures

could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior

floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.

Check fuel cap (if equipped):

Illuminates when the fuel cap may

not be properly installed. Continued

driving with this light on may cause

the Check engine warning light to

come on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and

Specifications chapter.

CHECK

FUEL

CAP

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Instrument Cluster

Brake system warning light: To

confirm the brake system warning

light is functional, it will

momentarily illuminate when the

ignition is turned to the ON position

when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,

or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON

position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this

time, seek service immediately from your dealership. Illumination after

releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake

system should be inspected immediately by your servicing dealership.

Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is

dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may

occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle

checked by your dealer immediately.

Anti-lock brake system: If the

ABS light stays illuminated or

continues to flash, a malfunction has

been detected, have the system

serviced immediately. Normal

braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is

illuminated.

Air bag readiness: If this light fails

to illuminate when ignition is turned

to ON, continues to flash or remains

on, have the system serviced

immediately. A chime will also

sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been

detected.

Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten

your safety belt. A chime will also

sound to remind you to fasten your

safety belt.

Charging system: Illuminates when

the battery is not charging properly.

BRAKE

ABS

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Instrument Cluster

Engine oil pressure: Illuminates

when the oil pressure falls below the

normal range, refer to Engine oil in

the Maintenance and

specifications chapter.

Engine coolant temperature:

Illuminates when the engine coolant

temperature is high. Stop the

vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to

Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.

Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engine is

running or hot.

Transmission PRNDL indicator:

Displays the gearshift positions. If

an “E”character is displayed or

flashing, this indicates a

transmission malfunction, contact your dealer immediately. Operating the

transmission with the “E”character illuminated may cause additional

damage to the transmission.

AdvanceTrac娂(if equipped):

Illuminates when the AdvanceTrac娂

system is active. If the light remains

on, have the system serviced

immediately, refer to the Driving

chapter for more information.

Traction Control娂active:

Illuminates when the Traction

Control娂is active. If the light

remains on, have the system

serviced immediately, refer to the Driving chapter for more information.

Steering column lock (if

equipped): Illuminates when the

steering column is locked. If the

light stays on the vehicle will not

start, make sure the key is the

correct key, refer to Securilock娂in the Locks and Security chapter.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Instrument Cluster

Low fuel (if equipped):

Illuminates when the fuel level in

the fuel tank is at or near empty

(refer to Fuel gauge in this

chapter).

Speed control: Illuminates when

the speed control is activated. Turns

off when the speed control system

is deactivated.

Low washer fluid (if equipped):

Illuminates when the windshield

washer fluid is low.

Door ajar (if equipped):

Illuminates when the ignition is in

the ON position and any door or

trunk is ajar.

Turn signal: Illuminates when the

left or right turn signal or the

hazard lights are turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.

High beams: Illuminates when the

high beam headlamps are turned on.

Electronic throttle control (if

equipped): Illuminates when the

engine has defaulted to a

’limp-home’operation. Report the

fault to a dealer at the earliest opportunity.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Instrument Cluster

WARNING CENTER

The instrument cluster is equipped with a warning center that will

provide the following warning messages:

Bulb warning: Displays when one

of the exterior front turn/park lamps

or rear brake/turn/tail lamps bulb

has burned out. Depress the RESET

control to return to the Trip odometer display.

Park brake ON: Displayed when

the park brake is ON. If the warning

stays on after the park brake is off,

contact your dealer as soon as

possible.

Park brake ON & needs service:

Displayed when the park brake is

ON and malfunctioning. If the

warning stays on or continues to

come on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.

Service park brake: Displayed

when the park brake needs

servicing. If the warning stays on or

continues to come on, contact your

dealer as soon as possible.

Apply park brake: Displayed when

the park brake needs to be applied.

If the warning stays on or continues

to come on, contact your dealer as

soon as possible.

Foot on brake: Displayed when the

foot brake needs to be applied. If

the warning stays on or continues to

come on, contact your dealer as

soon as possible.

Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door

is opened.

Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking

lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the

driver’s door is opened.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Instrument Cluster

GAUGES

Speedometer: Indicates the

current vehicle speed.

Engine coolant temperature

gauge: Indicates engine coolant

temperature. At normal operating

temperature, the needle will be in

the normal range (between “H”and

“C”). If it enters the red section,

the engine is overheating. Stop

the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and

let the engine cool.

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is

running or hot.

Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.

•Standard instrument cluster

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Instrument Cluster

•Optional instrument cluster

Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.

To reset, depress the RESET control. To switch the display from Trip A

to the Trip B, depress the A/B control.

•Standard instrument cluster

•Optional instrument cluster

Tachometer: Indicates the engine

speed in revolutions per minute.

Driving with your tachometer

pointer continuously at the top of

the scale may damage the engine.

Fuel gauge: Indicates

approximately how much fuel is left

in the fuel tank (when the ignition

is in the ON position). The fuel

gauge may vary slightly when the

vehicle is in motion or on a grade.

Refer to Filling the tank in the

Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Instrument Cluster

AUDIOPHILE SATELLITE READY AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH SIX CD

RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Seek: Press and release

SEEK / for previous/next

strong station, selection or track.

2. Rewind: In CD mode, press until

desired selection is reached.

Fast forward: In CD mode, press until desired selection is reached.

TEXT: TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your

Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit

to enable Satellite reception is available through your Lincoln dealer.

Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.

Dealer installed satellite kit available only in the continental United

States.

3. DSP (Digital Signal

Processing): Press DSP to access

the Ambiance menu. Ambiance gives

the feeling of “being there”to your

music, creating increased clarity as well as an open and spacious feel to

the music. Press SEL to engage/disengage. Turn the volume control to

increase/decrease the level of ambiance.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Occupancy: Press DSP again to change the occupancy mode to optimize

sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVER SEAT or REAR SEATS. Press SEL to

scroll through settings.

4. Mute: Press to MUTE playing

media; press again to return to

playing media

5. Eject: Press to eject a CD. Press

and hold to eject all loaded discs.

6. Bass: Press BASS; then press

SEL / to decrease/increase

the bass output.

Treble: Press TREB; then press

SEL / to decrease/increase

the treble output.

7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,

Balance and Fade controls to adjust

levels and set the clock.

8. Balance: Press BAL; then press

SEL / to shift sound to the

left/right speakers.

Fade: Press FADE; then press

SEL / to shift sound to the

rear/front speakers.

9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to

access clock mode, RDS on/off,

Traffic announcement mode,

Program type mode, and Shuffle

mode.

The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio

and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio

broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio

stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS

technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.

RDS on/off (Radio Data System) : Allows traffic, program type and

station information from RDS-equipped FM stations.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Traffic: In FM mode with RDS ON, this feature allows you to hear traffic

broadcasts. With the feature ON, press SEEK or SCAN to find a station

broadcasting a traffic report (if it is broadcasting RDS data).Traffic

information is not available in most U.S. markets.

FIND Program type: In FM mode and with RDS ON, this feature allows

you to search RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music

format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies, R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft,

Top 40. Select type them press SEEK or SCAN.

Show TYPE: In FM mode with RDS ON, this feature displays the

station’s call letters and format.

Shuffle: With a CD playing, press to play tracks in a random order.

Press MENU until SHUF appears in the display. Use SEL to select SHUF

DISC, SHUF TRAC or SHUF OFF.

Compression: With a CD playing, this feature brings soft and loud CD

passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press MENU until

compression status is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the

compression feature when COMP OFF is displayed. Press the SEL

control again to disable the feature when COMP ON is displayed.

Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS

is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the

hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.

10. Memory presets: To set a

station: Select frequency band

AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,

press and hold a preset button until

sound returns.

11. SAT (if equipped): Your

Audiophile radio comes equipped

with Satellite Ready capability. The

kit to enable the Satellite reception is available through your Lincoln

dealer. Detailed satellite instructions are included with the dealer

installed kit. Dealer installed satellite kit available only in the

continental United States.

12. AM/FM: Press to select

AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without

losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press

and momentarily hold AM/FM. AUTOSET will flash on the display. When

the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will

begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system will

store the last one in the remaining presets. Press again to disengage.

13. Power/volume: Press to turn

ON/OFF; turn to increase or

decrease volume levels.

Speed sensitive volume: Radio

volume changes automatically and

slightly with vehicle speed to

compensate for road and wind noise. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0

turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting.

Press and hold the volume control for five seconds. Then press SEL to

increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the volume setting. The level will

appear in the display.

14. Load: Press to load a CD. Press

and hold to load up to six discs.

15. CD AUX: Press to access CD or

AUX mode.

CD units are designed to play

commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only.

Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and

re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when

used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a

scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper

(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The

label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is

recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent

felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may

damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.

16. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a

brief sampling of radio stations or

CD tracks. Press again to stop.

17. Disc/Tune: Press or to

manually tune down/up the radio

frequency band, or to listen to the

previous/next track on the CD.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your

Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit

to enable Satellite reception is available through your Lincoln dealer.

Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.

Dealer installed satellite kit available only in the continental United

States.

For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free

888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at

www.siriusradio.com

PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Eject: Press to eject a cassette.

2. Eject: Press to eject a CD.

3. Bass: Allows you to increase or

decrease the audio system’s bass

output. Press BASS then press SEL

to decrease or increase the bass levels.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Treble: Allows you to increase or

decrease the audio system’s treble

output. Press TREB then press SEL

to decrease or increase the treble levels.

4. Balance: Allows you to shift

speaker sound between the right

and left speakers. Press BAL then

press SEL to shift sound to the left or right .

Fade: Allows you to shift speaker

sound between the front and rear

speakers. Press FADE then press

SEL to shift the sound to the rear or the front .

5. COMP (Compression): In CD

mode, press to bring soft and loud

passages together for a more

consistent listening level.

SHUF (Shuffle): Press to play CD

tracks in random order.

6. Select: Use to adjust bass, treble,

balance and fade levels.

7. Side 1–2: Press to change sides

on the tape.

Dolby: Dolby威noise

reduction: Reduces tape noise and

hiss; press to activate/deactivate.

8. REW (Rewind): Works in tape

and CD modes.

In tape mode, radio play continues

until rewind is stopped (with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the

tape is reached.

In CD mode, REW control reverses the CD within the current track.

FF (fast forward): Works in tape

and CD modes.

In the tape mode, tape direction

automatically reverses when the end of the tape is reached.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

In CD mode, FF advances the CD within the current track.

9. Mute: Press to mute the playing

media.

RDS: (Radio Data System): Allows

you to access FM stations which are RDS- equipped. Press RDS then

SEL to select from:

Traffic —Allows you to receive traffic announcements and control their

volume level.Traffic information is not available in most U.S.

markets.

Program Type —Allows you to set your audio system to select from

RDS-equipped stations for categories such as: Classic, Country, Info.,

Jazz, Oldies, R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.

Show —Allows you to view the frequency and program type of the

chosen radio station.

The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio

and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio

broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio

stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS

technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.

Setting the clock: Press RDS until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is

displayed. Press SEL to increase ( ) or decrease ( ).

10. Autoset: Press to set first six

strong stations into AM, FM1 or

FM2 memory buttons; press again to

return to normal stations.

11. Scan: Works in radio, tape and

CD modes. Press SCAN for a brief

sampling of radio stations, tape

selections or CD tracks.

12. Seek: Works in radio, tape and

CD modes. Press to access the

previous or next listenable

radio station, tape selection or CD track.

13. Tune: Works in radio mode.

Press to manually advance up or

down the frequency band.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

14. AM/FM/CD: Press AM/FM to

select a radio frequency. Press while

in tape or CD mode to return to

radio mode. Press CD to enter CD mode and to play a CD already in the

system.

CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12

cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,

certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not

function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular

shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs

with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted

into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to

become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be

identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive

labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your

dealer for further information.

15. Power/volume: Press to turn

the system on/off. Turn to

raise/lower the volume.

Speed sensitive volume: (if

equipped) Radio volume changes

automatically and slightly with

vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.

Press and hold the volume control for five seconds. Then press SEL to

increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the volume setting. The level will

appear in the display.

16. TAPE: Press to play reverse

side of the tape.

17. CD door: Insert the disc with the playing side down and printed side

up.

18. Tape door: Insert the tape facing the right.

RADIO FREQUENCIES

AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications

Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:

AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz

FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS

There are three factors that can effect radio reception:

•Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the

weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

•Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,

traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

•Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal

may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency

is displayed.

CD/CD PLAYER CARE

Do:

•Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.

•Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner

and wipe from the center out.

Don’t:

•Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods

of time.

•Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.

•Clean using a circular motion.

CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75

in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,

certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not

function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular

shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs

with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted

into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to

become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be

identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive

labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your

dealer for further information.

AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE

Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If

service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.

LINCOLN NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Lincoln Navigation System which

allows you to listen to the radio, play CDs and also navigate the vehicle

using a navigation DVD.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

THX audio system (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with

the THX威certified premium audio

system. This system creates optimal

acoustic quality for all seating

positions and road conditions.

The system offers an advanced

speaker system, amplifier, subwoofer and equalizer.

Your Lincoln Navigation System has a large range of features, yet is easy

to use. Guidance is shown on the display screen and is supplemented

with voice prompts. The display screen provides full information for

operating the system through use of menus, text screens and map

displays. Screen selections are made by touching the desired selection on

the screen.

1. VOL-PUSH: Press to turn the system ON/OFF. Turn to adjust the

audio volume level.

2. AUDIO: Press to enter audio mode and access radio, CD, CDDJ, DVD

(if equipped) settings.

3. MAP: Press to enter map mode and view your current vehicle position

on the map. Press and hold to obtain additional position information.

This will not function without a map DVD loaded.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

4. DEST: Press to enter Destination Entry mode. This allows you to

enter a destination and route to it. With an active route, pressing DEST

allows the user to request a Detour, display entire route, select route

preferences, or change or cancel the destination. This will not function

without a map DVD loaded.

5. MENU: Press to access system settings such as display, brightness,

clock mode (if equipped), etc.

6. CD OPEN CLOSE: Press to open/close the display screen and access

the CD player.

Cold temperature advisory

When operating the system below 32°Fahrenheit (0°Celsius), the

display screen requires 20–30 minutes warm-up to achieve maximum

brightness. Ensure that the system display setting is set to DAY mode

until maximum brightness is achieved (refer to Menu mode section).

Once maximum brightness is achieved, revert to AUTO mode display

setting.

Initial map display

After pressing AGREE to the initial

WARNING screen, you will move

into the initial map screen which

shows the current vehicle location.

Pressing the globe icon will take you

to the user settings —audible

feedback, navigation units, language

and clock (if equipped).

Quick Start — How to get going

To play a radio station:

1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is on.

2. Press AUDIO.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

3. Select AM, FM1 or FM2.

4. Press TUNE to adjust manually up ( ) or down ( ) the frequency

band.

5. Press SEEK to find the next strong station up ( ) or down ( ).

Note: If PTY (program type) is selected, the station selection will be

limited. Refer to Program Type (PTY) for further information.

To play a previously loaded CD:

1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is on.

2. Press AUDIO.

3. Press CD to select a CD which is already loaded. (NO CD will appear

in the display if there are no CDs loaded into the system). Use the

controls (1–6) to select the desired CD.

4. CD will begin to play.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

To load CDs:

1. Press CD OPEN CLOSE at the bottom of the screen to load a CD.

(The screen will open).

2. Press LOAD and select the desired slot. Or, press and hold LOAD to

auto load all available slots. The slot indicator lights blink rate will

increase when the system is ready to accept a disc. Push CD OPEN

CLOSE to close the screen. Once closed, the CD will begin to play.

3. Use the touch controls to advance tracks, scan, pause, etc.

To use the Navigation system:

1. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is on, and the navigation DVD is

loaded into the navigation DVD player.

Refer to Loading the map DVD or Navigation system —DVD location

in the Index for your vehicle’s navigation DVD location.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

2. Press DEST. The warning screen will appear. After reading, press

AGREE. The screen will show a map with your current location. Press

DEST again.

3. Select the desired type of

destination entry. You may select

“Address”,“Point of Interest”,

“Emergency”or “Previous Dest”

from the first screen.

Or, press “Next Page”to access

selections of “Memory Point”,

“Select from map”,“Freeway

Ent/Exit”and “Special Memory

Points.”After making your selection,

enter any required information.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

4. Press DEST at the bottom of the

map screen.

5. Choose the desired route by

pressing the NEXT button (if it

appears). There can be up to three

alternative routes.

6. Press START to begin the

navigation guidance.

To adjust the voice guidance volume:

1. Press the MAP hard key.

2. Press “Nav Menu”at the bottom left hand corner of the screen.

3. Press On/Off to turn the voice

guidance option on/off. Use the

numeric keys (1–7) to determine

the volume level of the guidance

voice prompts.

Voice activated commands (if equipped)

Your Lincoln Navigation System (LNS) may be equipped with a voice

activated feature which allows you to “speak”certain commands to the

system. Speaking clearly will help to ensure that the system correctly

responds to your commands. Ensure that the commands are spoken in

English (not any other language) and that they are spoken exactly as

they are written, or they may not function.

CD OPEN • CLOSE

DEST

MAP

AUDIO

VOL PUSH

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Press VOICE briefly (on your steering wheel controls) and the voice

icon appears on the Navigation display. Press REPEAT to hear the

previous command repeated from the navigation system.

The voice activated command feature will not operate if a map DVD is

not inserted into the navigation DVD unit.

At any time, you may say these commands to change modes:

•Radio •Audio on

•AM •Audio off

•FM1 •Power off

•FM2 •CD Changer (if equipped)

•CD •DVD (if equipped)

•Power on

During normal radio operation, you may say:

•Seek up •Seek down

Disc operation commands you may say when using a rear seat DVD (if

equipped):

•Track up •Track down

•Previous track •Disc up

•Disc down •Next disc

•Previous disc

During CDDJ or in-dash CD play, you may say:

•Track up •Track down

•Previous track •Disc up

•Next disc •Disc down

•Previous disc

To change the screen display, you may say the following commands:

•Screen off •Screen day mode

•Day mode on •Screen night mode

•Night mode on •Screen auto mode

•Auto mode on

Note: If you say “Screen off”, you must touch the screen in order to

activate the screen again. The screen will not turn on again with a voice

command.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Commands that jump over screens:

•Current position •Current location

•Map

While in navigation map mode, the following commands are available:

•Zoom in •Zoom out

•Minimum scale •Maximum scale

•North up •Change to North up

•Heading up •Change to heading up

•Map direction •Change map direction

•Mark this point •Mark

While in navigation POI mode, the following commands are available by

voice activation:

•Automobile club •AAA (Triple A)

•Auto service & maintenance •Auto service

•Gas station •Gas

•Parking garage •Parking lot

•ATM •Bank

•City hall •Civic center

•Community center •Convention center

•Exhibition center •Court house

•Higher education •University

•College •Hospital

•Library •Police station

•School •Amusement park

•Casino •Golf course

•Marina •Museum

•Park & recreation •Parks & recreation

•Performing arts •Ski resort

•Skiing •Sports complex

•Stadium •Tourist attraction

•Winery •Restaurant

•I’m hungry •American restaurant

•American food •Chinese restaurant

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

•Chinese food •Continental restaurant

•Continental food •French restaurant

•French food •Italian restaurant

•Italian food •Japanese restaurant

•Japanese food •Mexican restaurant

•Mexican food •Seafood restaurant

•Seafood •Other restaurant

•Other food •Shopping

•Shopping mall •Grocery store

•Airport •Bus station

•Ferry terminal •Historical monument

•Hotel •Park and ride

•Rental car agency •Rest area

•Rest stop •Tourist information

•Train station •Business facility

•City center •POI off

•Commuter rail station •City center

While in navigation destination (DEST) mode, the following commands

are available:

•Home •Go home

•Previous starting point •Go starting point

•Next way point map •First way point map

•Second way point map •Third way point map

•Fourth way point map •Fifth way point map

•Destination map •Delete destination

•Cancel destination

While in navigation guidance mode, the following commands are available

by voice activation:

•Repeat guidance •Repeat voice

•Louder •Softer

•Voice guidance off •Voice guidance on

•Open guidance screen •Close guidance screen

•Arrow guidance •Arrow guide

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

•Change to arrow guidance •Change to arrow guide

•Turn list guidance •Turn list guide

•Change to turn list guidance •Change to turn list guide

•Entire route map •Entire route

•Route overview •Reroute

•Detour •Detour entire route

Navigation help commands you may speak at any time:

•Help •Map

•Destination •Guidance

•Radio •Disc

•Map help •Destination help

•Guidance help •Radio help

•Disc help

Audio mode

Your Lincoln Navigation Audio System has many features including a full

range of audio functions. To access these functions, press AUDIO on the

main bezel. This will take you into audio mode.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Volume/power control

Press knob to turn the audio system

on/off. Turn to raise or lower

volume. The levels will be displayed

on the screen.

To activate the navigation mode,

press MAP or DEST.

To adjust the navigation voice output level, select the NAV MENU button

via the map screen.

Speed compensated volume (SCV)

With this feature, radio volume changes automatically with vehicle speed

to compensate for road and wind noise. To engage the SCV feature:

1. Press AUDIO.

2. Press SOUND.

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

3. SCV is located in the middle of

the screen. Press to turn on.

4. Select setting 1 to 7 or turn off.

The recommended level for the speed compensated volume is from level

1 through level 3. When activated, level 1 is the minimum setting and

level 7 is the maximum setting.

AM/FM select

The AM/FM control works in radio, CD and navigation modes.

AM/FM select in radio mode

Press AM/FM1/FM2 to switch between AM/FM1/FM2 memory preset

stations.

AM/FM select in CD mode

Press to stop CD play and begin radio play.

AM/FM select in navigation mode

The radio will continue to play in the background of the navigation

screens. To access, press AUDIO then AM/FM1/FM2.

Seek

•Press / to find the next

listenable station up/down the

frequency band.

•Press / to advance to the

next/previous track on a CD.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Tune adjust

Press TUNE to manually move

down/up ( / ) the frequency

band.

In CD mode, press TRACK to select

the previous/next ( / ).

Scan

Press SCAN for a brief sampling of

all listenable stations and CD tracks.

Press again to disable and remain on

the current selection.

Preset scan

Press PRESET SCAN to scan the

stations stored in the memory

presets.

Autoset memory preset

Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your

original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips

when you travel between cities with different radio stations.

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Starting autoset memory preset

1. Select a frequency band using

AM/FM1/FM2.

2. Press AUTO SET.

3. When the first six strong stations

are filled, the station stored in

memory preset control 1 will start

playing.

If there are less than six strong

stations available on the frequency

band, the remaining memory preset

controls will all store the last strong station available.

To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set

memory stations, press the AUTO SET again.

Radio data system (RDS) feature

This feature allows your audio

system to receive text information

from RDS-equipped FM radio

stations such as station call letters,

program type, etc. When in FM

mode, press RDS to

activate/deactivate.

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Traffic function

Select TRAFFIC for traffic

information broadcast from certain

stations which will automatically

interrupt radio or CD playback at a

preset volume level.

Traffic information not available in most U.S. markets.

Information feature

Press INFO to view the frequency,

call letters and PTY category of the

selected FM station.

Note: Not all stations support INFO function.

Program type (PTY)

This feature allows you to search for Radio Data System (RDS) stations

selectively by their program type.

Ensure that the RDS function is

turned on. Press PTY to turn the

feature on/off.

To set/change PTY:

Ensure that the RDS function is

turned on.

Press SET PTY to select from the

following program types:

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

•All

•Classical

•Country

•Information

•Jazz

•Religious

•Rock

•Soft

•Top 40

Once PTY has been programmed, press SEEK ( / ) or SCAN to

initiate a search up or down the frequency.

Preset scan and Autoset also initiate PTY searches. The search will stop

when the desired program type has been reached. If no program type is

found, a message will display.

Note: Not all stations support PTY information.

Sound functions

To access settings for Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade, DSP (Digital Signal

Programing), SCV (Speed Compensated Volume), and Occupancy modes:

1. Press AUDIO.

2. Press SOUND.

3. Select from Bass/Treb; Bal/Fade; DSP/SCV.

CD OPEN • CLOSE

DEST

MAP

AUDIO

VOL PUSH

FM1

87 . 7 MHZ

4:17

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

4. Press +/—to increase/decrease the levels.

Bass : Allows you to increase or

decrease the audio system’s bass

output.

Treble : Allows you to raise or

lower the audio system’s treble

output.

Fade : Allows you to adjust the

amount of sound emitted from the

front and rear speakers.

Balance : Allows you to adjust the

sound distribution between the right

and left speakers.

SCV (Speed Compensated Volume):

Automatically compensates for road

wind and noise. Refer to Speed

compensated volume earlier in this

chapter.

DSP Occupancy mode: Use to

optimize the sound based upon the

occupants in the vehicle. Select

from ALL SEATS, REAR SEATS or

DRIVER SEAT.

Setting memory preset stations

The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These

controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve

FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).

1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM1/FM2 touch controls.

2. Select a station.

3. Press and hold a memory preset until the sound returns. The

frequency will appear in the preset.

CNTR

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Satellite ready capability

Your Lincoln navigation system

comes equipped with Satellite ready

capability. The kit to enable Satellite

reception is available through your

Lincoln dealer. Detailed Satellite

instructions are included with the

dealer installed kit.

CD mode

CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75

in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,

certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not

function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular

shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs

with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted

into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to

become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be

identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive

labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your

dealer for further information.

Playing a previously loaded CD:

To begin CD play (if a CD is already

loaded), press AUDIO hard button

and then CD.

SOUND

FM1

FM2

SEEK TUNE

PRESET SCAN AUTO SET

SCAN

RDS TRAFFIC INFO PTY SET PTY

87.9 89.9 98.1 98.5 106.3 107.9

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Press CD. CD play will begin where

it stopped last.

Loading a CD:

1. Press CD OPEN CLOSE on the bezel.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

2. The navigation screen will fold down, allowing you access to the

in-dash six CD system.

3. Press LOAD and the desired CD slot number. The indicator light will

blink slowly at first, then quickly, signaling the system is ready.

4. Insert a disc.

5. To load more than one disc, press and hold LOAD. This will initiate

autoload and will allow you to load all open CD slots.

After an allotted time, the screen will close automatically or you may

press CD OPEN CLOSE on the bezel again.

6. Once the screen closes, the system will start playing the last CD

loaded.

Track

Press / to advance to the

next/previous track.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Rewind/fast forward in CD mode

Press to reverse or advance

(/ ) in the current CD track.

Scan feature in CD mode

Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling

of all tracks on the current CD.

Press again to disengage and remain

with the current track.

Shuffle feature in CD mode

When in CD (or CDDJ mode), press

SHUFFLE to engage the shuffle

feature. Press to select from

shuffling between tracks (SHUFFLE

TRACK) on the current CD or

between all tracks on all CDs

(SHUFFLE DISC). All tracks will be

played in random order. Press again

to disengage (SHUFFLE OFF).

Compression feature

The compression feature works in

CD mode and boosts more quiet

music and lowers louder music to

minimize the need for volume

adjustments.

When in CD or CDDJ mode, press COMPRESS to engage or disengage

the compression feature.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Pause

In CD mode, press PAUSE to pause

the current track. Press again to

continue playing.

Map mode

Map display information

To access the map display, press MAP on the bezel.

Once pressed, the current map

display will appear on the screen

showing the current vehicle

location.

Zoom control

When ’Zoom’is pressed, the scale indicator is shown on the screen. The

scale markings are: 1/32, 1/16,1/4, 1/8, 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128

miles. The control can be used in a number of ways:

•Touch and hold one of the arrow buttons for the map to be displayed

again at each zoom level.

CD OPEN • CLOSE

DEST

MAP

AUDIO

VOL PUSH

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

•Touch one of the arrow buttons repeatedly for the map to be

displayed again at the final zoom level.

•Touch one of the segments of the scale indicator for the map to be

displayed at the selected zoom level.

Additional map function buttons

To initiate the display of additional

map function buttons, tap the map

anywhere on the screen or press the

MAP hard key. These additional

features will disappear from the

screen within five seconds unless

pressed.

•STORE - stores current vehicle location as a memory point. Refer to

Memory Points for further information.

•POI (Point of Interest)- brings up the Quick POI menu which allows

the user to perform two functions:

Display POI icons on the map for one category.

Select local map area POIs as destinations or waypoints. The list of

local area POIs can be sorted by distance, name, or icon. Refer to

Points of Interest for further information.

If home has been previously programmed in the “Nav Menu”, the home

icon (house) will appear on the screen and is able to be selected as a

destination.

To delete POI icons from the map, touch the map again and press the

POI off button.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Route preferences

After entering a destination, the

Route preferences will appear on

the screen showing what is

currently selected. You may choose

to activate/deactivate selections

which the system will factor in when

calculating your route. Those

options are:

•Minimize Time/Distance

•Use Major Roads

•Use Toll Roads

•Use Ferries

Information function

INFO will appear on the screen

when you have calculated a

destination. Press INFO for more

information about the current

destination, if available.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

You will be able to view the

information (if available) as well as

choose to store the destination as a

memory point by pressing OK.

Screen symbols

Navigation symbol —Indicates

the current vehicle position and

points to the direction in which the

vehicle is currently traveling.

Destination symbol —Indicates

the current route destination.

Next turn symbol —Shows the

next maneuver that will need to be

taken on the current route.

North up button —Indicates that

the map is displayed with north to

the top of the screen. Press to

toggle between “North up”and

“Heading up”map display states.

Heading up button —Indicates

that the map is displayed with the

vehicle heading to the top of the

screen. The position of the pointer

indicates the direction of north on

the map. Press to toggle between “North up”and “Heading up”map

display states.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Avoid areas or points —The “X”

symbol indicates a point. to be

avoided in route calculations.

If the avoid point is enlarged to an

avoid area, it will appear on the

screen as a shaded box.

Way point symbol —Indicates the

location of a way point (locations

you wish to visit in route to your

ultimate destination) on the map.

Home position symbol —

Indicates the location on the map,

currently stored as the home

position.

Stored location symbol —

Indicates the location of a memory

point. This is the default symbol

used when the point is stored. (If

desired, an icon of your own choice can be selected from the 15 icons

available.) Refer to Choosing from the icon list.

GPS symbol—Indicates that

insufficient GPS satellite signals are

being received for accurate map

positioning. The symbol is not

displayed under normal operation.

Speaker icon symbol—Press to

turn voice guidance on/off.

Navigation menu

To access the Navigation Menu,

press NAV MENU at the bottom of

the map screen.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Once pressed, the Navigation Menu

will display showing the following

options:

•Route Options/Preferences

•Navigation Set Up

•Display Options

•Stored Locations

•On Route Scroll

•Voice Guidance/Volume

Depending upon whether or not a route is active will determine if route

options/route preferences is contained on the Navigation Menu.

Route options (destination entered)

Once in navigation mode and a

route is currently active, press

“Chng. route”to access the ROUTE

OPTIONS screen. Choose from the

following selections:

•Detour: Press to select a detour

around the current route. Refer

to Detour options later in this

chapter for further information.

•Route Preferences: When

creating a destination, select from: Minimize Time/Distance, Use Major

Roads, Use Toll Roads, Use Ferries.

•Display Whole Route: Will enter MAP mode and display your entire

chosen route.

Note: Route preference appears on the Nav menu when no destination

is entered.

While driving under route guidance, only follow an instruction

when it is safe to do so as the system cannot be aware of

changing conditions. Use voice guidance as much as possible, and only

view the display when driving conditions permit.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Ensure that you follow highway code restrictions and do not

take any risks. For example, if you are unable to make a U-turn,

continue on your journey. The navigation system will recalculate your

route to get you back to an appropriate road to your destination.

Navigation set up

The Navigation Set up screen will

allow you to make adjustments to

the navigation displays.

Average speed settings

Allows you to set approximate

speeds you drive. These speeds

enable the navigation system to aid

in calculating timing for routes.

Quick POI (Point of Interest)

Allows you to change the Quick POI

menu settings. Select the desired

Quick POI (Gas, ATM, etc.) and

then press ’List Categories’for

further categories, or ’Map Area

POIs’to show the desired POIs on

your current map.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Restore system defaults

Resets all system user-selectable

options to the default (automatic)

values (i.e. guidance, voice, search

area and route preferences).

Calibration

This feature is helpful if the car has

been towed, or if you notice it is not

registering at the correct vehicle

location on the map.

Press “Position”to reposition the

vehicle location. Press the screen to

scroll the map to the desired

location and press OK to confirm.

Press “Distance”to calibrate by

distance and improve the navigation

accuracy. It is recommended to

activate this function after every tire replacement. When the button is

highlighted, calibration is in process and will turn off automatically when

complete.

DVD map version

Displays the version of the inserted

navigation DVD. Refer to Ordering

additional map DVDs for further

information.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Display Options

The Display Options screen will

allow you make adjustments to the

navigation display screen. You can

choose from:

•Map Mode (Dual or Full)

•Guidance Mode (Arrows or Turn

list)

•Guidance Display (On or Off)

•Time to destination (Show or

Hide)

Stored locations

The Stored locations screen will

allow you to choose from

destinations that have been saved

into the navigation system.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

In this screen, you can select from

Memory Points, Special Memory

Points, Home, Avoid Area,

Destination and Way Point, or

Previous Destination. Please refer to

the Destination menu section for a

complete description of the

functions.

On route scroll

The system automatically scrolls

through the entire planned

navigation route either forwards or

backwards. To activate, press the

arrow buttons at the bottom left of

the map screen.

Voice guidance/volume

Allows you to turn the voice guidance option on/off and to determine the

volume level of the guidance voice prompts. To adjust:

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

1. Press the MAP hard key.

2. Press “Nav Menu”at the bottom left hand corner of the screen.

3. Press the speaker icon to turn the

voice guidance option on/off. Press

the desired number to select the

volume level for the voice prompts.

Home

To set home for the first time:

1. Press MAP.

2. Press “Nav. Menu”.

CD OPEN • CLOSE

DEST

MAP

AUDIO

VOL PUSH

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

3. Press “Stored Locations”.

4. Press “Home”.

5. Press “Add”.

6. Select the desired menu item you

wish to set as Home (Address,

Memory Point, Point of Interest,

Previous Destination).

7. Enter the required details.

8. Press OK to set the home

position.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

To view home, press the home icon

(house) on the Destination Entry

screen.

To view the set home position

1. Press MAP.

2. Press “Nav. Menu”.

3. Press “Stored Locations”.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

4. Press “Home”.

5. Press “List”.

Deleting a home location

1. Press MAP.

2. Press “Nav. Menu”.

3. Press “Stored Locations”.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

4. Press “Home”.

5. Press “Delete”.

6. Press YES to confirm.

Special memory points

There are five possible special

memory points that you can set.

To set a memory point:

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

1. Press the MAP hard key.

2. Press “Nav. Menu”.

3. Press “Stored Locations”.

4. Press “Special Memory”.

5. Press “Add”and select a position.

6. Select point 1–5.

7. Input a destination.

8. Press OK.

Once all five special memory points are entered, the “Add”control will

read as “Full”. You must delete points before more can be added.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

To delete a memory point:

1. Press the MAP hard key.

2. Press “Nav. Menu”.

3. Press “Stored Locations”.

4. Press “Special Memory”.

5. Press “Delete”. The list will

display.

6. Select the special memory point

to delete.

7. Press “Del. all”to delete all

entered special memory points.

8. Press “Yes”to confirm.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Detour options

You may engage the detour option once a route has already been

calculated by the system. To access the detour option:

1. Press the MAP hard key

2. Press “Chg. Route”.

Press DETOUR to activate. Use the

soft controls to select and enter the

number of miles you want to deviate

off of the current road.

Press DETOUR to confirm the

selection and to activate the detour

around the specified areas.

CD OPEN • CLOSE

DEST

MAP

AUDIO

VOL PUSH

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Press NEW ROUTE if you would

like the system to plan a different

route. The system may calculate an

entirely new route, depending on

what is available.

Route interruptions

In the course of your destination, you may decide to temporarily leave

your planned route for gas, food, etc. If you turn off the ignition, the

option to continue the route guidance will be displayed when the ignition

is turned on again. The route can be accessed once again after you press

“Agree”on the warning screen.

Route alterations or cancellations

To cancel or change your current

route from the map, press DEST.

You may then select from Detour,

Display whole route, Route

preferences, Destination Entry,

Calculate or Cancel Guidance.

Avoiding an area while under guidance

For one reason or another, you may

choose to avoid a certain area while

in route to your destination. To

select the area to avoid:

•From the MAP screen, press Nav

Menu.

•Select Route Options, then

Display Whole Route

•Press Turn List

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

•Press Avoid next to the street to be avoided

•Choose OK to confirm

•Press Reroute to activate

The new area is added to the list of stored avoid areas.

Note: In some circumstances, it may not be possible to avoid all selected

areas.

Listing areas to avoid

You can list all areas noted as

“avoid”.

•Press “Nav Menu”.

•Press “Stored locations”.

•Press “Avoid area”.

•Press LIST to view all previously

stored selections.

•Select the desired one. The map

screen will be displayed, showing

the location and address of the selected area.

Press Enlarge or Reduce to adjust the size of the visible area. Scroll the

map as required.

Deleting areas to avoid

To delete a selection from the

“Avoid area”list:

•From the stored locations menu,

select “Avoid area”.

•Press DELETE

•Select the desired area to be

deleted.

•Press DEL. ALL to delete all

stored areas.

•Press YES to confirm.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Destination menu

Press DEST on the main bezel to access the navigation mode.

Initial map display

After pressing AGREE to the initial

WARNING screen, you will move

into the initial map screen which

shows the current vehicle location.

Pressing the globe icon will take you

to the user settings —audible

feedback, navigation units, language

and clock (if equipped).

Note: There may be a slight time

delay between the soft key and the

hard key functions.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Route options

Once in navigation mode and a

route is currently active, press the

DEST hard key. The ROUTE

OPTIONS screen will appear and

allow you to choose from the

following selections:

•Detour —Press to select a detour around the current route.

•Route Preferences —When creating a destination, select from:

Minimize Time/Distance, Use Major Roads, Use Toll Roads, Use

Ferries.

•Display Whole Route: Will enter MAP mode and display your entire

chosen route.

•Destination Entry: Allows you to enter a new destination or select

from entries in: Address book, Points of Interest or Previous

Destinations.

While driving under route guidance, only follow an instruction

when it is safe to do so as the system cannot be aware of

changing conditions. Use voice guidance as much as possible, and only

view the display when driving conditions permit.

Ensure that you follow highway code restrictions and do not

take any risks. For example, if you are unable to make a U-turn,

continue on your journey. The navigation system will recalculate your

route to get you back to an appropriate road to your destination.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Destination entry

Search area

The mapped areas covered by your

map DVD are reflected in the

Search Area map that is displayed

on the Destination Entry screen.

Your navigation system uses a

regional search area. This area is

the area from which navigational

directions will be used.

To check your area or reset, press

CHANGE under the search area

listing. The map will open and allow

you to select another regional area.

Ensure that your search area is

correct prior to setting your

destination.

Selecting a destination

Press DEST to set a destination.

From this menu, you may select

from the following options:

•Address—Use to select a

destination based on a known

street address.

•Point of Interest—Use to

select a destination that is a point

of interest location (i.e., airport,

restaurant, hospital).

•Previous Destination —Use to select a destination from among the

last 20 entered destinations

•Emergency —Use to select the Emergency screen which will give

you the location of the closest Hospital, Police Station and Dealer.

Cancel

IL , IN , KY , MI , OH , WI

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Press ’Next Page’to access

more selections:

•Memory point —Use to select

from a memory point.

•Freeway exit/entrance —Use

to select a certain freeway exit or

entrance.

•Select from map —Use to select

a place on the map.

•Special Memory Points —Use to select a destination from

previously stored entries.

Address

1. From the destination entry

screen, select “Address”.

2. Input the house/building number

and press OK.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

3. Use the keyboard to type in the

street name. When you are typing

the street name, the system may

bring up possible roads that you can

select from. Use the arrows to scroll

up or down to select the desired

street.

4. Once the address is entered, the

system will pull up some possible

city and state matches. If one of

those is correct, select it. If not, you

may press either “5 near cities”for

another listing of five possible cities

and states (if available). Or, press

“Input City Name”.

5. You may use the keyboard to

input the desired city.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Points of interest (POI)

Select “Point of Interest”from the

Destination Entry Menu. In this next

menu, you will have the following

options:

•By Name—Enter POI name on

the keyboard. Touch “List”to

display the list of matching points

of interest. If there are too many

matches being listed, try entering

the town name first.

•By Category —Press “Category”. Scroll down the list to select the

category, then sub-category desired. Once you have selected a

category, your entry of the POI will be restricted to that category.

Previous destination

Press “Previous Destination”on the

Destination Entry Menu.

1. Select (touch) the desired item

from the list of destinations

previously reached. The item details

will be listed.

2. Confirm destination details.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Deleting stored locations

Your navigation system allows you to delete any stored loations (previous

destinations, memory points, special memory points, home, avoid areas,

destination and way points,etc.) To delete any of these stored locations:

1. Press the MAP hard key.

2. Press “Nav Menu”in the bottom

left hand corner of the screen.

3. Press “Stored locations”.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

4. Select the desired item you wish

to delete (previous destination,

memory point, etc.).

5. Press “Delete”at the bottom of

the screen.

6. The list of stored locations will be

displayed.

7. Select (touch) the entry to be

deleted. The item details will be

listed.

8. Press YES to confirm the

deletion.

9. Press DELETE ALL to delete all

stored locations.

Emergency

Your navigation system is equipped

with a separate Emergency screen.

To access the Emergency screen,

press “Emergency”.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

This screen will list the closest

police station, hospital and dealer to

your current location.

Memory point

Your navigation system allows you to go to special destinations you may

wish to again visit. To view any of these “memory points”without a route

calculated:

1. Press the DEST hard control.

2. Press “Next page”on the

Destination Entry screen.

3. Select “Memory Point”.

4. Select the desired item.

5. Confirm the details.

6. Press “Destination”to calculate a

route to that memory point.

Note: The list can be sorted by date, name or icon by pressing the

appropriate button.

Adding a memory point

You may add more memory points to be stored in the system.

1. With the map displayed, touch your finger to the screen to scroll to

the desired location. When you reach the desired location, remove your

finger from the screen and the map will stop scrolling. STORE will

appear on the screen.

2. Press STORE to add the location to the memory point list.

You may also add a memory point via the Navigation menu.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

1. Press the MAP hard key.

2. Press “Nav Menu”in the bottom

left hand corner of the screen.

3. Press “Stored locations”.

4. Select “Memory Point”.

5. Press “Add”at the bottom of the

screen.

6. Select the desired menu item.

7. Enter/select any required details.

The new point will be added to the

stored list of memory points.

8. Press OK. The new point will be

added to the list of stored memory

points.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

To give the new memory point a name:

1. Select it from the list.

2. Press NAME.

3. Enter the desired name.

Accessing memory point lists

1. Press the MAP hard key.

2. Press “Nav Menu”in the bottom left hand corner of the screen.

3. Press “Stored locations”.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

4. Press “Memory Point”.

5. Press LIST

6. Select the desired entry to view

its location details.

Sorting memory point lists

1. Access the desired list.

2. Press the button to sort the list

as desired (i.e. date, name, or icon).

When sorted by distance, the points

are ordered by distance from the

current vehicle location. When

sorting by icon, the icons are listed

in the order they appear on the icon

selection screen.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Choosing from the icon list

After selecting a location, press

ICON to edit. There will be 15

normal and three sound icons

displayed. Press the icon you wish

to use.

The normal icons will be displayed

on the map to indicate the map

location identified with that icon.

The audible icon will sound a

distinctive chime when the vehicle

is approaching the memory point

associated with that icon.

Deleting a memory point

•In the Memory Point Menu, press

DELETE.

•Select the entry to be deleted.

•The system will ask you to

confirm deletion. Press YES to

confirm.

The screen will briefly show

“Memory Point Deleted”.

Deleting all memory points

•In the Memory Point Menu, press

DELETE ALL.

•The system will ask you to confirm deletion. Press YES to confirm.

The screen will briefly show “All Memory Points Deleted”.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Freeway Entrance/Exit

To set a freeway entrance or exit as a destination:

1. Press the DEST hard key.

2. Press “Next page”to access

the second page of the Destination

Entry menu.

3. Select “Freeway Entrance/Exit”.

1. Enter freeway name—Enter

the freeway name using the

keyboard. Press “List”to select a

freeway from those displayed.

To enter numbers in the freeway

name, press “Sym”.

2. Select entrance/exit—Press

“Entrance”if you wish to join the

freeway at this junction. Press

“Exit”if you wish to leave the

freeway at this junction.

3. Select Junction—The screen

will display a list of junctions on the

freeway. They can be listed either

by distance, (from the current

vehicle location), by pressing the

“Dist”button or alphabetically by

pressing the “A-Z”button. Select the desired entrance or exit.

The destination details are displayed for confirmation.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Destination and way points

The Store Dest. & Way Point menu

is used after a destination or way

point has been entered for the first

time using the Destination Entry

menu. You can store and delete

destinations and way points

(locations you wish to visit in route

to your ultimate destination). You

can also select the order in which

you visit them.

Adding (storing) a destination or way point

•Once a destination is entered,

press ADD to store the location.

The Store Dest. & Way Point

menu is displayed.

•Select whether you want to store

an Address, Point of Interest or

Previous Destination.

•Enter the necessary details for

the selection.

•If a destination was entered, it

will be stored as the current location. If a way point was entered, it

will be added to the list of way points.

Listing destinations and way points

Press LIST to display the stored way

points and destination (if entered).

The first way point to be visited is

at the bottom of the list and the

destination is at the top.

You may view the map location of

any entry. On the map, location

details for the entry are displayed at

the top of the screen.

To adjust the position of the way point (or destination), scroll the map

as required.

Press OK.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Editing and changing order of way points and destination

Press “Chg. Order”to change the

order in which the way points are

visited. The points are listed

chronologically from bottom up, the

destination being on the top.

Press the MAP button to edit the

way point location on the map

display.

Press OK to confirm.

Deleting way points and destination

After pressing DELETE, the list of

way points and the destination (if

entered) is displayed, showing the

’Delete Dest. &Way Pt.’menu.

Select the entry to be deleted. Press

YES to confirm.

Press DELETE ALL to delete all

way points. Press YES to confirm.

Selecting route criteria

Once you have selected a

destination, you may change the

routing criteria by pressing

“Change”in the route preferences

screen. Refer to Route preferences

for further information.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Route calculation

Once the route criteria is selected,

the navigation system automatically

calculates the selected destination.

The route appears on the display

screen and a voice prompt provides

instructions.

The system may calculate up to four

routes for the desired destination.

Press “Next”to scroll through the

various planned routes. Press “Start”

to confirm the route selection and begin route guidance.

Next route

Your navigation system may map

more than one route to the same

destination. After the destination

has been calculated, it will appear

on the map screen. Press NEXT in

the upper right hand corner to scroll

through other possible routes to the

same destination.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Menu mode

To access menu mode, press the MENU hard control.

Menu mode allows you to access:

•System Set-up

•Information —Gives you the

Lincoln Customer Assistance

Center information.

•Brightness/Contrast —Allows you

to adjust the brightness and

contrast on the screen.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

•Screen off —Allows you to turn

off the navigation screen.

System setup

The system set up menu contains the following user settings:

•Audible Feedback —Press to

activate audible voice navigation

commands. Press again to

deactivate.

•Navigation Units —Press to

toggle between Metric/English

units.

•Language —Press to toggle

between English, French, or

Spanish.

•Clock

Setting the clock

Once in Menu mode, press CLOCK

to set the hours/minutes.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

General information

Safety information

Please read and follow all stated safety precautions. Failure to do

so may increase your risk of collision and personal injury. Ford

Motor Company shall not be liable for any damages of any type

arising from failure to follow these guidelines.

Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the system. See your Ford or

Lincoln Mercury dealer.

The driver must not attempt to operate any detailed operation of

the navigation system while the vehicle is in motion. Give full

attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park in a

safe place before performing detailed operations.

If the system is used for an extended period of time with the

vehicle stationary, ensure that the engine is running to avoid

draining the battery.

Do not apply pressure to the display screen.

The navigation system is not a substitute for your personal judgement.

Route suggestions should not supersede local traffic regulations or safe

driving practices.

Do not follow route suggestions if they direct you to perform an unsafe

or illegal maneuver, would place you in an unsafe situation, or would

route you into an area that you consider unsafe.

Drivers should not rely on screen displays while their vehicle is in

motion. Let the voice guide you. If viewing is necessary, pull off the road

to a safe location.

Do not use the navigation system to locate emergency services.

For road safety reasons, the driver should program the system only when

the vehicle is stationary. Certain functions will therefore not operate

while the vehicle is in motion.

The map database DVD does not reflect road detours, closures or

construction, road characteristics such as rough road surface, slope or

grade, weight or height restrictions, traffic congestion, weather or similar

conditions.

To use the system as effectively and safely as possible, obtain an

up-to-date map database DVD whenever they become available.

Set the volume level so that you can hear directions clearly.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

Do not disassemble or modify the system as this may lead to damage and

void your warranty. If a problem occurs, stop using the system

immediately and contact your Ford or Lincoln Dealer.

Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance

Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could

void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been

tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with

the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference

to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an

experienced radio/TV technician for help.

The database reflects reality as existing before you received the

database and it comprises data and information from government

and other sources, which may contain errors and omissions.

Accordingly, the database may contain inaccurate or incomplete

information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances,

and due to the nature of the sources used. The database does not

include or reflect information on neighborhood safety, law

enforcement, emergency assistance, construction work, road or

lane closures, vehicle or speed restrictions, road slope or grade,

bridge height, weight or other limits, road or traffic conditions,

special events, traffic congestion, or travel time.

Radio reception factors

There are certain factors that may effect your radio reception.

•Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is.

The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km

(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.”Signal

modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their

strength/volume relative to other stations.

•Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s

antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems.

Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences,

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering

structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal.

•Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger

signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may

temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station

frequency is displayed.

Principles of GPS (global positioning system) operation

Your system directs you based on information derived from global

positioning satellites, road maps stored on the DVD, sensors in your

vehicle and the desired destination. The system compiles all necessary

information to guide you to your selected destination. Space satellites

determine the vehicle’s current location and transmit position and time

signals to your car.

If the vehicle has been parked for a long period of time, the navigation

function may be temporarily unresponsive. The navigation system will

operate reliably again once GPS reception is available for a few minutes.

Limited GPS reception

System performance may be adversely affected if GPS reception is

interrupted or interference occurs over a distance of several miles. The

following are possible causes for GPS reception being interrupted. If the

vehicle is:

•in multi-story parking garages

•in tunnels and under bridges

•inside or in between buildings

•by forests or tree-lined avenues

•in heavy rain showers and thunderstorms

•in valleys and in mountainous regions

•roads under cliffs

Ensure that you do not have any metal objects on the rear parcel shelf.

If your windows are tinted, ensure that you use non-metal tinting instead

of metal oxide tinting. Both of these factors can interrupt GPS reception.

Cleaning the display

Do not spray cleaning fluid directly onto the unit. Instead, spray onto a

soft cloth and gently wipe the unit. Only recommended products should

be used.

•Recommended products- Rubbing alcohol based cleaner (i.e., methyl

alcohol) or a damp clean cloth.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

•Not harmful but not recommended- ammonia cleaner, neutral

detergent.

•Harmful to system and not recommended- acid cleaner, alkali cleaner,

benzene cleaner.

Do not clean any part of the system with benzene, paint thinner or any

other solvent.

Do not spill liquids of any kind onto the unit.

Loading the map DVD

•Your navigation DVD unit is located in the trunk.

•Ensure that the vehicle ignition is ON.

•If a DVD is already loaded in the Navigation unit, push the eject

button.

•Load the DVD with the printed side up. Do not allow moisture or

foreign objects to enter the slot.

The navigation system utilizes a database stored in a special format on a

DVD. It is recommended always to use the latest update of this map

DVD.

•The navigation system will only work with DVDs specifically intended

for your navigation system.

•Always store the map DVDs in their protective cases when not in use.

Ordering additional map DVDs

If you wish to order a replacement or additional map, please call

1–888–NAV-MAPS (1–888–628–6277) or to log onto www.navtech.com.

Latest map DVDs

The map content is constantly changing due to new roads, traffic

restrictions, etc. . Therefore, it is not always possible to exactly match

the DVD map with the current roadways. For best results, always use the

latest version of the map DVD. Map information is regularly updated, but

all areas are not necessarily covered to the same level of detail. Some

areas, in particular private roads, may not be included on the database.

To help with accuracy, always use the latest DVD version for navigation.

Customer service

If you need help operating your navigation/audio system, want to report

a map database error or want to obtain a map DVD, please call 1 (888)

628–6277 (NAV-MAPS) or log onto www.navtech.com.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Entertainment Systems

DUAL ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

(DEATC) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. A/C control: Press to turn on

and manually control the air

conditioning. Press again to

disengage. Press AUTO for the system to automatically control the

temperature.

2. Recirculation control: Press to

engage/disengage. Used to manually

enable or disable recirculated air

operation. When activated, recirculates air in the cabin thereby reducing

the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle. May also

help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.

Will work in all modes except defrost. Recirculation turns off

automatically when floor, floor/defrost or defrost mode is selected. To

reduce humidity inside the vehicle, turn recirculation off.

3. Passenger side temperature

control: Press to engage the dual

zone feature of the DEATC system.

Allows the passenger to choose and

control a different temperature than the driver, if desired.

4. Rear defrost: Press to defrost

the rear window. Refer to Rear

window defrost in this section for

more information.

A/C

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Climate Controls

5. DUAL zone selector: Press to

toggle the system between single

zone and dual zone control.

6. (Defrost): Distributes outside air through the windshield

defroster ducts and the demister outlets. Can be used to clear ice or fog

from the windshield. The system will automatically provide outside air to

reduce window fogging.

7. :Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister

outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts. The system will

automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.

8. :Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts. The

system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.

9. :Distributes air through the instrument panel, center console

registers, and the front and rear seat floor ducts.

10. :Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console

registers.

11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and

the fan will not operate.

12. Auto: To engage automatic

temperature control, press AUTO

and select the desired temperature

using the temperature control. The system will automatically determine

fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and outside or recirculated air,

to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature.

13. Manual override controls:

Allows you to manually select where

airflow is directed. To return to full

automatic control, press AUTO.

14. Driver’s side temperature

control: Controls the temperature

on the driver side of the vehicle in

dual zone and controls the

temperature of the entire vehicle in single zone.

DUAL

OFF

AUTO

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Climate Controls

15. Fan Speed: Press to manually

increase/decrease fan speed. In

manual mode, the display will

show with a bar graph to

indicate fan speed. Fan speed can be manually adjusted in AUTO mode.

To allow the system to automatically control fan speed, press AUTO.

16. EXT control: Press to display

the outside air temperature. Press

again to return to interior

temperature. Exterior readings are most accurate when the vehicle is

moving.

17. Temperature conversion:

Press to toggle between Fahrenheit

and Celsius temperature on the

DEATC display only. The set point temperatures in Celsius will be

displayed in half-degree increments.

Heated wiper rest: Heats the windshield wiper blades in order to

reduce the chance of ice buildup and to aid in defrosting. This feature

operates automatically when the outside temperature is near or below

freezing.

DUAL ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

(DEATC) SYSTEM WITH HEATED AND COOLED SEATS

(IF EQUIPPED)

EXT

F C

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Climate Controls

1. A/C control: Press to turn on

and manually control the air

conditioning. Press again to

disengage. Press AUTO for the system to automatically control the

temperature.

2. Recirculation control: Press to

engage/disengage. Used to manually

enable or disable recirculated air

operation. When activated, recirculates air in the cabin thereby reducing

the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle. May also

help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.

Will work in all modes except defrost. Recirculation turns off

automatically when floor, floor/defrost or defrost mode is selected. To

reduce humidity inside the vehicle, turn recirculation off.

3. Passenger side temperature

control: Press to engage the dual

zone feature of the DEATC system.

Allows the passenger to choose and

control a different temperature than the driver, if desired.

4. Passenger heated seat: Press to turn on the passenger side heated

seat. Press once for full heat (three lights above passenger heated seat

control will be illuminated). Press a second time to select medium heat

(two lights). Press a third time to select low heat (one light). Press a

fourth time to disengage the feature (all lights will be off).

5. R(Rear defrost): Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to Rear

Window Defrost for more information.

6. Passenger cooled seat: Press to turn on the passenger side cooled

seat. Press once for full cool (three lights above passenger cooled seat

control will be illuminated). Press a second time to select medium cool

(two lights). Press a third time to select low cool (one light). Press a

fourth time to disengage the feature (all lights will be off).

Automatic heated/cooled passenger seat: To engage, press the

passenger side heat and cool seat controls simultaneously. The center

light above the passenger side heated and cooled controls will illuminate

and the display will show . This allows the seat to automatically heat

or cool based on the climate control temperature selected. Press either

control to disengage.

7. (Defrost): Distributes outside air through the windshield

defroster ducts and the demister outlets. Can be used to clear ice or fog

from the windshield. The system will automatically provide outside air to

reduce window fogging.

A/C

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Climate Controls

8. Airflow direction control: Press to toggle through the air

distribution modes listed below. The selected mode will illuminate in the

display.

—Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister

outlets and the front and rear seat floor ducts. The system will

automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.

:Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts. The

system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.

: Distributes air through the instrument panel, center console

registers, and the front and rear seat floor ducts.

:Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console

registers.

9. Off: Outside air is shut out and

the fan will not operate.

10. Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where

airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.

11. Auto: Press to engage automatic

temperature control. Use the

temperature control to select the

desired temperature setting. The system will automatically determine fan

speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and outside or recirculated air to

heat or cool the vehicle, allowing it to reach the desired temperature.

Press and hold AUTO for about two seconds to toggle between single

zone and dual zone temperature control.

12. Driver heated seat: Press to turn on the driver side heated seat.

Press once for full heat (three lights above driver heated seat control will

be illuminated). Press a second time to select medium heat (two lights).

Press a third time to select low heat (one light). Press a fourth time to

disengage the feature (all lights will be off).

13. Driver cooled seat: Press to turn on the driver side cooled seat.

Press once for full cool (three lights above driver cooled seat control will

be illuminated). Press a second time to select medium cool (two lights).

Press a third time to select low cool (one light). Press a fourth time to

disengage the feature (all lights will be off).

Automatic heated/cooled driver seat: To engage, press the driver side

heat and cool seat controls simultaneously. The center light above the

driver side heated and cooled controls will illuminate and the display will

OFF

AUTO

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Climate Controls

show . This allows the seats to automatically heat or cool based on

the climate control temperature selected. Press either control to

disengage.

14. Driver’s side temperature

control: Controls the temperature

on the driver side of the vehicle in

dual zone and controls the

temperature of the entire vehicle in single zone.

15. Fan Speed: Press to manually

increase/decrease fan speed. In

manual mode, the display will

show with a bar graph to

indicate fan speed. Fan speed can be manually adjusted in AUTO mode.

To allow the system to automatically control fan speed, press AUTO.

16. EXT control: Press to display

the outside air temperature. Press

again to return to interior

temperature. Exterior readings are most accurate when the vehicle is

moving.

17. Temperature conversion:

Press to toggle between Fahrenheit

and Celsius temperature on the

DEATC display only. The set point temperatures in Celsius will be

displayed in half-degree increments.

Heated wiper rest: Heats the windshield wiper blades in order to

reduce the chance of ice buildup and to aid in defrosting. This feature

operates automatically when the outside temperature is near or below

freezing.

OPERATING TIPS

•To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place

the air flow selector in the position.

•To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle:

Do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.

Do not drive with recirculation engaged.

•In order to allow the vehicle to “breathe”using the outside air inlet

vents, do not leave the air flow selector in the OFF position when the

vehicle is parked.

•Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the

airflow.

EXT

F C

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Climate Controls

•Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of

the windshield.

•With the ignition in the OFF position after operating the vehicle, some

vehicle sounds related to the climate control system may be heard.

•Approximately two minutes after key off, the air distribution doors

may adjust their positions as part of the normal operating process.

•Demisters, located at the far left and right sides of the dash, usually

blow out a small amount of airflow in order to reduce side window

fogging.

•Outboard panel registers, located at the left and right sides of the

dash, blow out a small amount of airflow when in Floor, Floor/Defrost,

and Defrost modes. This also reduces side window fogging.

•Do not place items over the

climate temperature sensor grid.

This may cause improper

operation of the system.

To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:

1. Select .

2. Ensure that recirculation is disengaged.

3. Set the temperature control to full heat.

4. Set the fan to the highest speed.

5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.

To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents

located in the middle of the instrument panel.

Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these

objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Climate Controls

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

Press the rear window defroster

control to clear the rear window and

sideview mirrors of thin ice or fog.

The light above the control will

illuminate to indicate that the rear

defrost is operating.

The ignition must be in the RUN position and the engine running in

order to operate the rear window defroster.

The rear window defroster turns off automatically after a predetermined

amount of time, if a low battery condition is detected, or if the ignition is

turned to the OFF position. To manually turn off the rear window

defroster at any time, press the control again.

Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside

of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the

rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and

will not be covered by your warranty.

CABIN AIR FILTER

Your vehicle is equipped with a Cabin air filter. The particulate air

filtration system is designed to reduce the concentration of airborne

particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the air being supplied to the

interior of the vehicle. The particulate filtration system gives the

following benefits to customers:

•Improves the customer’s driving comfort by reducing particle

concentration

•Improves the interior compartment cleanliness

•Protects the climate control components from particle deposits

The filter is located just in front of the windshield under the cowl grille

on the passenger side of the vehicle.

For more information, or to replace the filter, see your Ford, Lincoln or

Mercury Dealer.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Climate Controls

HEADLAMP CONTROL

Turns the lamps off.

Turns on the parking

lamps, instrument panel lamps,

license plate lamps and tail lamps.

Turns the headlamps on.

Autolamp control

The autolamp system provides light

sensitive automatic on-off control of

the exterior lights normally

controlled by the headlamp control.

•To turn autolamps on, rotate the

control counterclockwise to the

auto position.

•To turn autolamps off, rotate the

control clockwise to the off

position (O).

The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a period of time after

the ignition switch is turned to OFF. The period of time that the lights

remain on is set at the factory but the time may be adjusted using the

sequence below.

Exit delay programming sequence

1. Start with the ignition in the RUN position and autolamps selected on

the headlight switch.

2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. (This will start a 10 second

timer during which steps 3 through 6 must be completed.)

3. Turn the autolamps OFF.

4. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.

5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.

6. Turn the autolamps on (The park lamps and low beams will turn on.)

7. Turn the autolamps off after the desired delay time is reached. (The

maximum programmable delay is 3 minutes. The lights that turned on in

step 6 will turn off.)

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

Foglamp control (if equipped)

The foglamps can be turned on

when the headlamp control is pulled

toward you and is in any of the

following positions:

•Parking lamps

•Low beams

•Autolamps

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)

Turns the highbeam headlamps on with a reduced output.

To activate with automatic transmission:

•the ignition must be in the RUN position;

•the headlamp control is in the OFF position, Parking lamps position,

or Autolamp position when the autolamp function has not turned on

the headlamps (daytime); and

•the transmission is out of Park.

Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during

inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System

does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide

adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your

headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.

High beams

Pull toward you until control stops

to activate. Repeat to deactivate.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

Flash to pass

Pull toward you slightly to activate

and release to deactivate.

PANEL DIMMER CONTROL

Use to adjust the brightness of the

instrument panel during parklamp,

headlamp and autolamp operation.

•Rotate up to brighten.

•Rotate down to dim.

•Rotate fully up to turn on the

interior lights.

Note: The panel dimmer control is not active when the autolamp system

has determined that it is daytime.

HEADLAMP VERTICAL AIM ADJUSTMENT

Your vehicle is equipped with VOL (Visual Optical Left) headlamps.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface approximately 7.6 meters (25 feet)

from a vertical wall or screen directly in front of it.

•(1) Eight feet

•(2) VOL - subtract 50 mm (2.1 in) from the measurement of the

center of the low beam lamp to the ground.

•(3) Twenty five feet

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

100

•(4) Horizontal reference line

2. Measure the height from the

center of your headlamp to the

ground and mark a 2.4 meter (8

foot) horizontal reference line on

the vertical wall or screen 50 mm

(2.1 in) below this height (a piece

of masking tape works well). The

center of the lamp is marked by a

3.0 mm circle on the headlamp lens

(use the low beam center mark).

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and

open the hood.

4. On the wall or screen you will

observe a light pattern with flat

edges at the top of the beam

pattern. If the flat edges are not at

the horizontal reference line, the

beam will need to be adjusted.

To see a clearer light pattern for

adjusting, you may want to block

the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp, then usea6mmallen

wrench or screwdriver to adjust the headlamp up or down.

6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS

NON-ADJUSTABLE.

7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

TURN SIGNAL CONTROL

•Push down to activate the left

turn signal.

•Push up to activate the right turn

signal.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

101

INTERIOR LAMPS

Map lamps

The map lamps and controls are

located on the dome lamp. Press the

controls in front of each map lamp

to activate the lamps.

BULBS

Replacing exterior bulbs

Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.

Using the right bulbs

Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs

must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.”for North America and an

“E”for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern

and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly

or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn

time.

Function Trade Number

Headlamp low beam H11LL

Headlamp low beam (HID) D2R

Headlamp high beam 9005

Park and turn lamp (front) 3457 A/K (amber)

Side marker lamp (front) LED*

Foglamp 9145

Tail lamp, brakelamp, side lamp 3157K

Rear turn lamp 3157 A/K (amber)

Backup lamp 921

License plate lamp 168

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

102

Function Trade Number

High-mount brakelamp LED*

Map lamp (with moon roof) 906

Rail lamp (rear) 168

Map lamp (front) 906

Sun visor lighted mirror lamp E9SB-13465-BA

Glove compartment 194

Ashtray 194

Luggage compartment lamp 212-2

All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.

To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer.

* See your dealer or a qualified technician for LED replacement.

Interior bulbs

Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.

Map lamps

For bulb replacement, see a qualified service technician or your dealer.

Replacing headlamp bulbs

The headlamp assembly contains the low beam bulb, the high beam bulb,

park/turn lamp bulb and led side marker. To replace any of these items,

the headlamp assembly must be removed from the vehicle as follows:

1. Make sure headlamp switch is in

the OFF position, then open the

hood.

2. Lift the hood and remove the

upper and lower sight shields by

removing the seven plastic retaining

pins.

3. On the headlamp assembly,

remove the three headlamp

attaching bolts (8mm socket).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

103

Replacing headlamp bulbs - lowbeam

1. Remove the headlamp assembly

as described under Replacing

headlamp bulbs earlier in this

section.

2. Remove the four T20 torx head

screws holding the bulb retaining

cover on.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise

and remove it by pulling the bulb

straight out.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of

children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do

not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to

break the next time the headlamps are operated.

Install the new bulb in reverse order, while also replacing the seal on the

bulb retaining cover. The kits for replacement seals are available at

Lincoln or Ford dealers.

Replacing HID headlamp bulb (if equipped)

The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge”

source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. The bulb is replaceable.

When the bulb is burned out, the HID bulb must be replaced by your

dealer or a qualified technician.

Replacing headlamp bulbs - highbeam

1. Remove the headlamp assembly

as described under Replacing

headlamp bulbs earlier in this

section.

2. Remove the four T20 torx head

screws holding the bulb retaining

cover on.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise

and remove it by pulling the bulb

straight out.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

104

Install the new bulb in reverse order, while also replacing the seal on the

bulb retaining cover. The kits for replacement seals are available at

Lincoln or Ford dealers.

Replacing the LED sidemarker

1. Remove the headlamp assembly

as described under Replacing

headlamp bulbs earlier in this

section.

2. Remove the three T20 torx head

screws holding the bulb retaining

cover on.

3. Pull the LED assembly straight

out and replace with a new

assembly.

Install the new assembly in reverse order, while also replacing the seal

on the bulb retaining cover. The kits for replacement seals are available

at Lincoln or Ford dealers.

Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal lamp bulbs

1. Remove the headlamp assembly

as described under Replacing

headlamp bulbs earlier in this

section.

2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise

and pull it straight out of the

headlamp assembly.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

105

Replacing foglamp bulbs

1. Make sure the headlamp switch is

in the OFF position and disconnect

the electrical connector from the

foglamp bulb.

2. Rotate the foglamp bulb

counterclockwise and remove from

the foglamp.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs

Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is

designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, the

entire assembly must be replaced as follows:

1. Pull down on the headliner, near

the location of the high-mount stop

lamp, to release the dual lock

attachment.

2. Expose enough of the high-mount

stop lamp to disconnect the

electrical wire and remove the two

retaining bolts (8 mm head).

3. Remove and replace the high-mount stop lamp bulb.

Install the new stop lamp in reverse order.

Replacing tail lamp/backup bulbs

For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician.

Replacing license plate lamp bulbs

For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Lights

106

MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER

Windshield wiper: Rotate the end

of the control away from you to

increase the speed of the wipers;

rotate towards you to decrease the

speed of the wipers.

Windshield washer: Push the end

of the stalk:

•Quickly pressing the end of the

stalk switch causes a single wipe

without washer fluid.

•Push and hold the end of the

stalk to activate the washer. The

wash cycle will continue for up to

ten seconds or until released. After release, there will be three

clearing wipes.

Note: The windshield wiper will not automatically cycle if the washer

fluid is low, refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and

Specifications chapter.

Changing the wiper blades

To replace the wiper blades:

1. Pull the passenger side wiper arm

away from the windshield into the

service position. Turn the blade at

an angle from the wiper arm.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

107

2. Firmly press the release tab from

the bottom side of the wiper arm to

unlock wiper blade from wiper arm.

3. Pull the wiper blade down toward

the windshield to remove it from the

arm.

4. Attach the new wiper to the

wiper arm and reposition the clip

until it locks.

Repeat for driver’s side wiper arm.

POWER TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING COLUMN

The steering column can be

adjusted manually by moving the

four-way rocker adjustment control

located below the turn signal/wiper

control stalk. Hold the control to

adjust.

The telescope function is adjusted

by moving the control toward the

driver to telescope out and toward

the instrument panel to telescope

in.

The tilt function is adjusted by moving the control up or down.

Easy entry/exit feature

When you remove the key, the column will move, if this feature is

activated through the Message Center, to the full in and up position,

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

108

refer to the Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter. When the

key is inserted into the ignition, the column will return to the previous

setting.

Note: The easy entry/exit feature will prevent the steering wheel from

returning to the memory position until the key is inserted into the

ignition.

Memory feature

The steering column positions are saved when doing a memory set

function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features

when a memory position is selected through the remote entry

transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver’s door

(if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Memory seats/steering

column/mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety

Restraints chapter.

If the steering column adjustment control is pressed during memory

recall it will cancel the automatic operation and the column will respond

to manual adjustment of the control.

Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.

STEERING COLUMN LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)

The steering column will automatically lock when the key is removed

from the ignition. When the vehicle key is inserted into the ignition, the

steering column will automatically unlock.

ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR

To turn on the visor mirror lamps,

lift the mirror cover. Adjust the

amount of light by sliding the

control.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to

your option package.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

109

Storage compartment

Press to open the storage

compartment.

The storage compartment may be

used to secure sunglasses or a

similar object.

AUXILIARY POWER POINT

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang

any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.

Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered

by your warranty.

The auxiliary power point is located

on the instrument panel next to the

cigarette lighter. Push the top door

to access the power point.

Do not plug optional electrical

accessories into the cigarette lighter.

Use the power point.

Do not use the power point for

operating the cigarette lighter

element.

Another auxiliary power point is located in the center console, refer to

the Center Console in this chapter for more information.

The Maximum power each power point can supply depends on the fuse

rating. For example: a 20A fuse should supply a maximum of 240 Watts,

a 15A fuse should supply a maximum of 180 Watts and a 10A fuse should

supply a maximum of 120 Watts. Exceeding these limits will result in a

blown fuse.

Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

110

POWER WINDOWS

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let

children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure

themselves.

When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free

of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in

the proximity of the window openings.

Press the rocker switches to open and close windows.

•Press the bottom portion of the

rocker switch to open.

•Press the top portion of the

rocker switch to close.

Express Down (One Touch Down)

To make the front driver or

passenger windows open fully

without holding the window control,

press the bottom portion of the

driver window control completely

down to the second detent or

“Express Down”position. Press the

control in either direction to stop window operation.

Express Up (One Touch Up)

To make the front driver or

passenger windows close fully

without holding the window control,

press the top portion of the driver

window control completely down to

the second detent or “Express Up”

position. Press the control in either

direction to stop window operation.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

111

When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free

of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in

the proximity of the window openings.

Restoring the Express up functionality

Under low battery power conditions, Express Up only functionality may

be lost. To reset this function after restoring full battery power, press the

rocker switch to the Express Up position, hold the switch until the glass

reaches the stall position and continue to hold for 2 seconds.

Accessory delay

With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten

minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until

either front door is opened.

Bounce Back (Front Windows Only)

When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the

window is moving upward, the window will automatically move down and

stop at a prescribed position.

Bounce Back Override (Front Windows Only)

To override Bounce Back, within 2 seconds after reaching Bounce Back

position, if the rocker switch is moved from the Neutral to the Express

Up position the window will travel up with no bounce back

protection. If the switch is released before the window reaches fully

closed position, the window will stop. For example: Bounce Back

Override can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the window or

seals.

Window lock

The window lock feature allows only

the driver to operate the rear power

windows.

To lock out the rear window

controls press the right side of the

control. Press the left side to

restore the window controls.

MIRRORS

Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with an inside rear view mirror which has an

auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

112

the clear state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach the

mirror. When the mirror detects bright light from behind, it will

automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare at night only.

The mirror will automatically return to the clear state whenever the

vehicle is placed in R (Reverse)(when the mirror is on).

Do not block the sensor on the backside of the mirror since this may

impair proper mirror performance. (Examples: no parking stickers or

hanging tags.)

Ensure the mirror is pulled down low enough to prevent visibility

interference with the overhead console. The mirror support arm has two

pivot points which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from

SIDE to SIDE.

Without Navigation System

Press the control to turn the mirror

on. Press the control again to turn

the mirror off.

With Navigation System

The illuminated LED to the right of

the AUTO button indicates if the

mirror is in the auto-dimming

function. To turn the mirror off push

the OFF button until the LED goes

out.

Electronic compass (if equipped)

The compass reading will remain accurate during most driving

conditions. Unknown to the driver, the compass is continuously

re-calibrating due to changing magnetic fields and subtle, slow changes

in vehicle magnetics which can occur over the life of the vehicle. If

heading appears inaccurate re-calibrate mirror, refer to Compass

calibration adjustment.

COMP MIRROR

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

113

The compass reading will remain fixed when significant levels of

magnetic interference are experienced (such as steel bridges). The

compass will return to normal operation upon leaving the magnetized

area.

If highly magnetized items (such as magnetic mount antennas) are

placed very near the compass the display will change to “C”.Ifa“C”is

displayed, remove the source of magnetic interference and re-calibrate

compass, refer to Compass calibration adjustment.

Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that

varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. A correct zone

setting will eliminate this error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.

Compass zone adjustment

1. Determine which compass zone

you are in by referring to the zone

map.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN

position.

3. With the compass display turned

on, press and hold the COMP side of

the control for no more than six

seconds until the zone selection

number appears in the mirror

display window. If a “C”appears

repeat this step.

4. Release the COMP side of the

control, then press it down again.

5. Repeatedly press until your zone number is shown in the mirror

display, then release.

6. The display will show all segments, then return to normal compass

mode within ten seconds.

Compass calibration adjustment

Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and

high voltage lines.

123

6 7 8 9 1011

COMP MIRROR

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

114

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Press and hold the COMP side of the control until “C”appears in the

mirror display.

3. Drive the vehicle slowly (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles until the

display reads a direction.

4. The compass is now calibrated.

Power side view mirrors

To adjust your mirrors:

1. Select to adjust the left

mirror or to adjust the right

mirror.

2. Move the disk control in the

direction you wish to tilt the mirror.

3. Return to the center position to

disable the adjust function.

Memory feature

The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory

set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality

features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry

transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver’s door

(if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Memory seats/steering

column/mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety

Restraints chapter.

Heated outside mirrors

Both mirrors are heated

automatically to remove ice, mist

and fog when the rear window

defrost is activated.

Do not remove ice from the

mirrors with a scraper or

attempt to readjust the mirror

glass if it is frozen in place.

These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

115

Fold-away mirrors (if equipped)

Pull the side mirrors in carefully

when driving through a narrow

space, like an automatic car wash.

POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS

The accelerator and brake pedal

should only be adjusted when the

vehicle is stopped and the gearshift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

Press and hold the rocker control

(located on the instrument panel) to

adjust accelerator and brake pedal.

•Press the top of the control to

adjust the pedals away from you.

•Press the bottom of the control to adjust the pedals towards you.

Memory feature

The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a

memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle

personality features when a memory position is selected through the

remote entry transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the

driver’s door (if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Memory

seats/steering column/mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and

Safety Restraints chapter.

Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the

pedals while the vehicle is moving.

SPEED CONTROL

With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)

or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed

control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

116

Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that

are winding, slippery or unpaved.

Setting speed control

The controls for using your speed

control are located on the steering

wheel for your convenience.

1. Press the ON control and release

it.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET + control and

release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

5. The indicator light on the

instrument cluster will turn on.

Note:

•Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a

steep hill.

•If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you

may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.

•If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below

your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

117

Resuming a set speed

Press the RES control and release

it. This will automatically return the

vehicle to the previously set speed.

The RES control will not work if the

vehicle speed is not faster than 30

mph (48 km/h).

Increasing speed while using speed control

There are two ways to set a higher

speed:

•Press and hold the SET + control

until you get to the desired

speed, then release the control.

You can also use the SET +

control to operate the Tap-Up

function. Press and release this

control to increase the vehicle set

speed in small amounts by 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

•Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the

vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.

Reducing speed while using speed control

There are two ways to reduce a set

speed:

•Press and hold the CANCEL or

SET - control until you get to the

desired speed, then release the

control. You can also use the

CANCEL or SET - control to

operate the Tap-Down function.

Press and release this control to

decrease the vehicle set speed in

small amounts by 1 mph (1.6

km/h).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

118

•Depress the brake pedal until the

desired vehicle speed is reached,

press the SET + control.

Turning off speed control

There are two ways to turn off the speed control:

•Depress the brake pedal . This

will not erase your vehicle’s

previously set speed.

•Press the speed control OFF

control.

Note: When you turn off the speed

control or the ignition, your speed

control set speed memory is erased.

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

These controls allow you to operate some audio control features.

Audio control features

Press MEDIA to select AM, FM1,

FM2, CD, or TAPE (if equipped).

RES

SET

CANCEL

MUTE

VOL

MEDIA

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

119

In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:

•Press ⌬or ⵜto select preset

stations within the selected radio

band.

In Tape mode:

•Press ⌬or ⵜto select the next

selection on the tape.

In CD mode:

•Press ⌬or ⵜto select the next

selection on the CD.

In any mode:

•Press VOL + or − to adjust

volume.

Press the PHONE/MUTE control to

mute the playing media. Press again

to return to the playing media.

Navigation steering wheel controls (if equipped)

These controls allow you to operate some audio and navigation control

features when the vehicle is equipped with the navigation feature.

MUTE

VOL

MEDIA

MUTE

VOL

MEDIA

MUTE

VOL

MEDIA

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

120

Audio control features

Press MEDIA to select:

•AM, FM1, FM2, or

•CD.

In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:

•Press NEXT to select preset

stations within the selected radio

band.

In CD mode:

•Press NEXT to select the next

selection on the CD.

In any mode:

•Press VOL ⌬or ⵜto adjust

volume.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

121

Navigation control features

Press and hold VOICE until the

voice icon appears to use the

navigation voice guidance.

Press REPEAT control to hear

previous command repeated from

the navigation system.

MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

To open the moon roof:

•Push up on the control to raise

the moon roof to the vent

position.

•Push up on the control, while the

moon roof is in the slide range, to

activate the Auto-Tilt feature.

•Push the front portion of the

control rearward to open the

moon roof.

•Press the front portion of the

control past the first detent to activate the Auto Open feature.

To close the moon roof:

•Press the rear portion of the control forward to close the moon roof.

•Press the rear portion of the control past the first detent to activate

the Auto close feature.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

122

•To close from the vent, intermediate and full open positions, push the

rear portion of the control forward.

Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children

unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.

When closing the moon roof, you should verify it is free of

obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the

proximity of the window openings.

Bounce Back

When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof opening as the

moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically open and stop at a

prescribed position.

Bounce Back Override

To override Bounce Back, within 2 seconds after reaching Bounce Back

position, if the switch is moved from the Neutral to the auto close

position the moon roof will close with no bounce back protection.

If the switch is released before the moon roof reaches fully closed

position, the moon roof will stop. For example: Bounce Back Override

can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon roof or seals.

HOMELINK姞WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The HomeLink威Wireless Control System, located on the driver’s visor,

provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters

with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency

codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate operators,

security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.

When programming your HomeLink威Wireless Control System to

a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of

the way to prevent potential harm or damage.

Do not use the HomeLink威Wireless Control System with any garage

door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by

U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener

model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot

detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet

current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact

HomeLink威at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

123

Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for

future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威equipped vehicle

purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the

programmed Homelink威buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to

Programming in this section.

Programming

Do not program HomeLink威with the vehicle parked in the garage.

Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the

ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威.Itis

also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威for quicker

training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

1. Press and hold the two outside

buttons releasing only when the red

light begins to flash after 20

seconds. Do not repeat step one to

program additional hand-held

transmitters to the remaining two

HomeLink威buttons. This will erase

previously programmed hand-held

transmitter signals into HomeLink威.

2. Position the end of your

hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威

button you wish to program (located on your visor) while keeping the

red light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold

both the HomeLink威and hand-held

transmitter button. Do not release

the buttons until step 4 has been

completed.

Some entry gates and garage door

openers may require you to replace

step 3 with procedures noted in the

“Gate Operator and Canadian Programming”in this section for Canadian

residents.

4. The red light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons

when the red light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light indicates

acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’radio frequency signals.)

5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威button and observe the red

light. If the light is a constant red, programming is complete and your

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

124

device should activate when the HomeLink威button is pressed and

released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,

begin with step 2 in the “Programming”section —do not repeat step 1.

Note: If the red light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a

continuous red, proceed with steps 6 through 8 to complete

programming of a rolling code equipped device.

6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,

locate the “learn”or “smart”button (usually near where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the unit).

7. Press and release the “learn”or “smart”button. (The name and color

of the button may vary by manufacturer.)

Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.

8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and

release the HomeLink威button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence

again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other

rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to

complete the programming.

HomeLink威should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To

program additional HomeLink威buttons begin with step 2 in the

“Programming”section. For questions or comments, please contact

HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

Gate Operator & Canadian Programming

During programming, your

hand-held transmitter may

automatically stop transmitting —

not allowing enough time for

HomeLink威to accept the signal

from the hand-held transmitter.

After completing steps 1 and 2

outlined in the “Programming”

section, replace step 3 with the following:

Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is

advised to unplug the device during the “cycling”process to prevent

overheating.

•Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威button (note step 3 in the

“Programming”section) while you press and release —every two

seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency

signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will

flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威accepts the radio

frequency signal.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

125

•Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming”section.

Operating the HomeLink姞Wireless Control System

To operate, simply press and release

the appropriate HomeLink威button.

Activation will now occur for the

trained product (garage door, gate

operator, security system, entry

door lock, or home or office lighting

etc.). For convenience, the

hand-held transmitter of the device

may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still

programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威at www.homelink.com or

1–800–355–3515.

Erasing HomeLink姞buttons

To erase the three programmed

buttons (individual buttons cannot

be erased):

•Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink威buttons until the

indicator light begins to

flash-after 20 seconds. Release

both buttons. Do not hold for

longer that 30 seconds.

HomeLink威is now in the train (or

learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step

2inthe“Programming”section.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞button

To program a device to HomeLink威using a HomeLink威button previously

trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button. Do NOT release the

button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without

releasing the HomeLink威button, follow step 2 in the “Programming”

section.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威at www.homelink.com

or 1–800–355–3515.

CELL PHONE USE

The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly

important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

126

drivers must not compromise their own or others’safety when using

such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety

and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency

situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications

equipment to avoid negating these benefits.

Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular

phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications

systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.

A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.

The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to

avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to

operate Mobile Communications Equipment.

MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)

With the ignition in the RUN

position, the message center,

located on your instrument cluster,

displays important vehicle

information by monitoring vehicle

systems. When you change displays,

a brief indicator chime will sound. The system will also notify you of

potential vehicle problems with a system warnings display followed by a

long indicator chime.

Operator selectable features

These features are controlled by the message center controls located

above the radio.

FUEL

Press this control for the following displays:

•Distance to Empty

•Average Fuel Economy

•Display On/Off

RESET

Press this control to select and reset functions shown in the FUEL,

SETUP and STATUS controls.

SETUP

Press this control for the following displays:

•Units (English/Metric)

160

240

km/h

FUEL RESET SETUP STATUS

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

127

•Autolocks

•Easy Exit Seat (if equipped)

•Autolamp Delay

•Lock Chirp (if equipped)

•Language

STATUS

Selecting this function from the STATUS control causes the message

center to cycle through each of the systems being monitored. For each

of the monitored systems, the message center will indicate either an OK

message or a warning message for four seconds.

The sequence of the status check report is as follows:

•washer fluid level

•oil life in XX%

•AC (cabin) filter XX%

•engine temperature

•brake fluid level

•charging system

•doors closed (driver and passenger side, front and rear). This message

can only be reset by closing the door(s). If the RESET control is

pressed, PLEASE CLOSE DOOR will be displayed.

•trunk status

•exterior lamps (front and rear turn, brake, tail and side repeater lamp

(if equipped) status)

•Traction Control娂or AdvanceTrac娂(if equipped)

Message center functions

Dist To Empty (DTE)

Selecting this function from the

FUEL control estimates

approximately how far you can drive

with the fuel remaining in your tank

under normal driving conditions.

Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling to allow this feature

to correctly detect the added fuel.

The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for

one second when you have approximately 80 km (50 miles) to empty. If

you RESET this warning message, this display and tone will return

within 10 minutes.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

128

DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based on

your recent driving history of 800 km (500miles). This value is not the same

as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel economy is

reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected.

Fuel Econ Avg

Select this function from the FUEL

control to display your average fuel

economy in liters/100 km or

miles/gallon.

If you calculate your average fuel

economy by dividing liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled (miles

traveled by gallons used), your figure may be different than displayed for

the following reasons:

•your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up

•differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at

service stations

•variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another

•rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 liter (gallon)

Checking your highway fuel economy using the electronic

message center display

The following procedure will allow you to accurately monitor your actual

highway fuel economy. Since this procedure requires the vehicle speed

control system to be set to highway speeds, it must be run only on

suitable roadways where long distance speed control can be safely

maintained.

You may notice gradual improvement in fuel economy over the course of

your vehicle’s break-in period (approximately 1,600 kilometers [1,000

miles]).

1. Press the FUEL control to display

miles to empty. Press again to

display average fuel economy.

2. Set the speed control. Refer to

Speed control in this chapter.

3. Press the RESET control to clear the system memory.

•Actual highway fuel economy is now displayed. This current

average measure will change as the speed control system changes the

engine speed to maintain a constant vehicle speed. This is most

noticeable in hilly environments.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

129

4. Drive the vehicle at least 8 km (5 miles) with the speed control

system engaged to display a stabilized average.

5. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.

It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed

control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.

Display On/Off

Select this function from the FUEL control to turn your message center

display OFF or ON.

Units (English/Metric)

1. Select this function from the

SETUP control for the current units

to be displayed.

2. Press the RESET control to

change from English to Metric.

Autolocks

1. Select this function from the

SETUP control for the current

display mode.

2. Press the RESET control to turn

the autolocks ON or OFF.

Easy exit seat (if equipped)

1. Select this function from the

SETUP control for the current

display mode.

2. Press the RESET control to turn

the easy entry/exit ON or OFF.

Autolamp delay

1. Select this function from the

SETUP control for the current

display mode.

2. Press the RESET control to select

a new Autolamp delay value.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

130

Lock chirp (if equipped)

1. Select this function from the

SETUP control for the current

display mode.

2. Press the RESET control to turn

the lock chirp ON or OFF.

Language

1. Select this function from the

SETUP control for the current

language to be displayed.

2. Pressing the RESET control

cycles the message center through

each of the language choices.

3. Press and hold the RESET

control to set the language choice.

System warnings

System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your

vehicle’s operating systems.

In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will

cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4

seconds.

The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no

more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of

the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the

RESET control and clearing the warning message.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

131

Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories:

•They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.

•They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-RUN cycle has been

completed.

This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within

the vehicle.

Warnings Status

Engine power reduced Warning cannot be reset

Pull off road safely

Turn off ignition

Driver’s door ajar

Passenger door ajar

Driver rear door ajar

Passenger rear door ajar

Park brake on & need service

Park brake on

Check engine temp Warning returns after 10 minutes

Check charging system

Transmission overheated

Check transmission

Low fuel level

Check fuel cap

ETC-engine failsafe mode

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

132

Warnings Status

Low brake fluid level Warning returns after the ignition key

is turned from OFF to RUN

Check tail lamps

Check brake lamps

Check front turn lamps

Check side repeater lamps (if

equipped)

Check rear turn lamps

Check Traction Control

Check AdvanceTrac (if

equipped)

Trunk ajar

Low washer fluid

Check AC (cabin) filter

Change oil soon

Oil change required

Service park brake

Apply park brake

Foot on brake

Data error

ENGINE POWER REDUCED. Displayed when the engine is

overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the

engine. If this warning stays on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.

PULL OFF ROAD SAFELY. Displayed when the engine is overheating.

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. If this

warning stays on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.

TURN OFF IGNITION. Displayed when the engine is overheating. Turn

off the engine. If this warning stays on, contact your dealer as soon as

possible.

DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver’s door is not

completely closed.

PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger side door is

not completely closed.

DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver’s rear door

is not completely closed.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

133

PASSENGER REAR DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger side

rear door is not completely closed.

PARK BRAKE ON & NEED SERVICE. Displayed when the park brake

is ON and malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come

on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.

PARK BRAKE ON. Displayed when the park brake is ON. If the

warning stays on after the park brake is off, contact your dealer as soon

as possible.

CHECK ENGINE TEMP. Displayed when the engine coolant is

overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the

engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Refer to

Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. If the

warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as soon as

possible.

CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM. Displayed when the electrical system is

not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical accessories

when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of the

electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes on

when the engine is operating at normal speeds, have the electrical

system checked as soon as possible.

TRANSMISSION OVERHEATED. Indicates the transmission is

overheating. This warning may appear when driving in a low gear at a

high speed for an extended period of time. Stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible, turn off the engine and let it cool. Check the

transmission fluid and level. Refer to Transmission fluid in the

Maintenance and specifications chapter. If the warning stays on or

continues to come on, contact your dealer for transmission service as

soon as possible.

CHECK TRANSMISSION. Indicates the transmission is not operating

properly. If this warning stays on, contact your dealer as soon as

possible.

LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed when you have approximately 80 km (50

miles) to empty.

CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly

installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuel

filler cap in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.

ETC-ENGINE FAILSAFE MODE. Displayed when the engine has

defaulted to a ’limp-home’operation. If the warning stays on or continues

to come on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

134

LOW BRAKE FLUID. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the

brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Checking and

adding brake fluid in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.

CHECK TAIL LAMPS. Displayed when the tail lamps are activated and

at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as soon as safely possible

and have the burned out lamp replaced.

CHECK BRAKE LAMPS. Displayed when the brake lamps are

activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as soon as

safely possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. The center

high-mount brakelamp is not monitored.

CHECK FRT TURN LAMPS. Displayed when the turn signals are

activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as soon as

safely possible and have the burned out lamp replaced.

CHECK SIDE REPEATER LAMPS (if equipped). Displayed when

the turn signals are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the

lamps as soon as possible and have the burned out lamp replaced.

CHECK REAR TURN LAMPS. Displayed when the turn signals are

activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as soon as

possible and have the burned out lamp replaced.

CHECK TRACTION CONTROL. Displayed when the Traction

Control娂system is not operating properly. If this message is displayed

on the message center and the amber T/C OFF light in the Traction

Control娂on/off switch is not illuminated, the Traction Control娂system

will be partially operable. If this warning stays on, contact your dealer for

service as soon as possible. For further information, refer to Traction

control娂in the Driving chapter.

CHECK ADVANCETRAC (if equipped). Displayed when the

AdvanceTrac娂system is not operating properly. If this message is

displayed on the message center the AdvanceTrac娂system will be

partially operable. If this warning stays on while the engine is running,

contact your dealer for service as soon as possible. For further

information, refer to AdvanceTrac娂stability enhancement system in

the Driving chapter.

TRUNK AJAR. Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed.

LOW WASHER FLUID. Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than

one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to Checking and

adding washer fluid in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

135

CHECK A/C (cabin) FILTER. Displayed when the A/C cabin filter life

remaining is 5 percent or less. When A/C filter life left is between 5%

and 0%, the CHANGE A/C FILTER SOON message will be displayed.

When A/C filter life left reaches 0%, the A/C FILTER CHANGE

REQUIRED message will be displayed.

To reset the A/C filter monitoring system to 100% after each A/C Filter

change:

1. Press the STATUS control to

access the System Check function,

the message center will display A/C

FILTER XXX% RESET FOR NEW.

2. Press and hold the RESET

control to set to 100%, the message

center will display IF NEW FILTER

HOLD RESET.

3. After a successful reset, the

message center will display A/C

FILTER LIFE SET TO 100%.

CHANGE OIL SOON/OIL CHANGE REQUIRED. Displayed when the

engine oil life remaining is 5 percent or less. When oil life left is between

5% and 0%, the CHANGE OIL SOON message will be displayed. When oil

life left reaches 0%, the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be

displayed.

An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center.

USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.

To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change

[approximately 8,000 km (5,000 miles) or 180 days] perform the

following:

1. Press the STATUS control to

access the System Check function.

Press RESET to reset oil %.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

136

2. Press and hold the RESET

control to set to 100%.

3. After a successful reset, the

message center will display OIL

LIFE SET TO 100%.

To reset the oil monitoring system to your personalized oil life %:

1. Press the STATUS control to

access the System Check function.

Press RESET to reset oil %.

2. Press RESET and SETUP

controls at the same time to activate

a service mode which will display

OIL LIFE XX% RESET TO ALTER.

3. Press RESET until you find your

personalized OIL LIFE XX%.

SERVICE PARK BRAKE. Displayed when the park brake needs

servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your

dealer as soon as possible.

APPLY PARK BRAKE. Displayed when the park brake needs to be

applied. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your

dealer as soon as possible.

FOOT ON BRAKE. Displayed when the foot brake needs to be applied.

If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as

soon as possible.

DATA ERROR. These messages indicate improper operation of the

vehicle network communication between electronic modules.

•Fuel computer

•Engine sensor

•Gear selection

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

137

•Door sensor

•Trunk sensor

•Exterior lamps

•Traction Control娂and AdvanceTrac娂(if equipped)

•Memory feature

Contact your dealer as soon as possible if these messages occur on a

regular basis.

INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL

Press the remote trunk release

control on the instrument panel to

open the trunk.

You can render the switch

inoperable by locking the button

with your master key. Do this and

also lock your glove box before you

give your vehicle to the valet

personnel (do not give them the

master key or remote entry keyfob, only the gray valet key).

The remote trunk release control and power door locks will be disabled

when the vehicle perimeter alarm system is armed. This control will not

work until the vehicle perimeter alarm system is disarmed. Refer to

Perimeter Alarm System in the Locks and Security chapter.

FUEL DOOR RELEASE

Press the remote fuel door release

control on the instrument panel to

open the fuel door.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

138

The fuel door has a manual override

release located in the trunk. Pull the

tab to open the fuel door.

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF ASHTRAY

In order to prevent damage, follow these instructions when

removing/installing the ashtray.

Removal:

1. Push the ashtray face to slide

open.

Note: Do not remove the ashtray

drawer.

2. Pull the ashtray insert upward

from the ashtray drawer and

remove.

Installation:

1. Place the ashtray insert into the

ashtray drawer.

2. Push the ashtray drawer in to close.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

139

CENTER CONSOLE

Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These

include:

1. Cupholders

2. Sliding arm rest (lift latch to slide

forward or rearward)

Note: Slide the arm rest to the

rearward position to open the utility

compartment

3. Utility compartment, inside has

power point (front drivers side) and

coin holders (front passenger side)

4. Air vents to the rear seating

positions

5. Traction control娂/AdvanceTrac娂(if equipped)

6. Electronic park brake

Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you

in a collision.

POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT

Position the driver floor mat so that

the eyelet is over the pointed end of

the retention post and rotate

forward to lock in. Make sure that

the mat does not interfere with the

operation of the accelerator or the

brake pedal. To remove the floor

mat, reverse the installation

procedure.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

140

CARGO NET (IF EQUIPPED)

The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area.

This net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision.

There are four straps on the net and

six anchors in the trunk that can be

used for securing different sized

objects.

To attach the cargo net to the

anchors:

•Take the bottom strap of one side

of the net and push the anchor

through the strap loop.

•Take the top strap of same side

of the net and push the anchor through the strap loop.

•Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other side.

LUGGAGE RACK (IF EQUIPPED)

The luggage rack is dealer installed only. See your local Lincoln Mercury

dealership.

The maximum load is 75 kg (165 lb) on the luggage rack structure. The

vehicle’s roof panel is not designed to carry a load.

When loading the luggage rack, it is recommended to evenly distribute

the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Ensure that the load

is securely fastened.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driver Controls

141

KEYS

Your vehicle is equipped with two master keys and a valet key lock

system. The master key will access the driver’s door, trunk, glove box,

remote trunk release control and ignition. The valet key will access door

and ignition only.

Refer to the Securilock娂Passive Anti-Theft System section for

information on Securilock娂keys.

POWER DOOR LOCKS

Press the top of the control to

unlock all doors and the bottom to

lock all doors.

When the vehicle’s security system

is armed, the power door locks and

remote trunk release control are

disabled; these features will not

work until the security system is

disarmed.

Smart locks

With the key in any ignition position:

•The driver’s door will automatically unlock if it is locked by the

driver’s power lock control while the driver’s door is open.

•All doors will automatically unlock if the passenger’s door is locked by

the passenger’s power lock control while the passenger’s door is open.

The vehicle may still be locked with the key in the ignition, and

performing one of the following actions:

•Pressing the manual lock button on the door.

•Operating the remote entry transmitter.

•Operating the keyless entry keypad (with the driver’s door closed).

•Operating the driver’s door with a key.

Opening all windows and moonroof (if equipped)

You can open the vehicle’s windows and moonroof (if equipped) by using

the door key or the control on the remote entry transmitter.

Press and hold the control on the remote entry transmitter, or turn

the key toward the front of the vehicle and hold it for more than two

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

142

seconds to begin to open all the windows and moonroof. Releasing

the control on the remote entry transmitter, or returning the key to

the center position will stop all motion.

Note: The ignition must be in the 2 (OFF) position and the accessory

delay feature must not be activated in order for this feature to operate.

Closing all windows and moonroof (if equipped)

Note: This operation is only available using the door key in the driver

door lock cylinder.

You can close the vehicle’s windows and moonroof (if equipped) by using

the door key.

Turn the key toward the back of the vehicle and hold it for more than

two seconds to begin to close all the windows and moonroof. Releasing

the key to the center position will stop all motion.

Note: The ignition must be in the 2 (OFF) position and the accessory

delay feature must not be activated in order for this feature to operate.

The rear windows do not have bounce-back protection. If an

obstruction occurs, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle

and hold for more than two seconds in order to reopen all the windows

and moonroof.

Before operating power windows and moonroofs, you should

verify that they are free of obstructions and ensure that children

and/or pets are not in the proximity of window openings.

Central locking/Two stage unlocking

When unlocking the driver door with the key, turn it once toward the

front of the vehicle to unlock that door only, if the two-stage unlocking is

enabled. Turn the key a second time to unlock all doors. When locking,

turn the key toward the back of the vehicle to lock all doors.

Two stage unlocking may be disabled and re-enabled (to allow all vehicle

doors to unlock simultaneously) by simultaneously pressing the

and controls on the remote entry transmitter for four seconds.

Note: The turn lamps will flash twice to confirm that a change to the

feature has occurred.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

143

Childproof door locks

•When these locks are set, the

rear doors cannot be opened from

the inside.

•The rear doors can be opened

from the outside when the doors

are unlocked.

The childproof locks are located on

the rear edge of each rear door and

must be set separately for each

door. Note: Setting the lock for one

door will not automatically set the lock for both doors.

•Rotate the control in the direction of the arrow to engage the

childproof lock.

•Rotate the control in the opposite direction to disengage the

childproof lock.

INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE

Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment

release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in

the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.

Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and

location of the release handle.

To open the luggage compartment

door (lid) from within the luggage

compartment, pull the illuminated

“T”shaped handle and push up on

the trunk lid. The handle is

composed of a material that will

glow for hours in darkness following

brief exposure to ambient light.

The “T”shaped handle will be

located either on the luggage

compartment door (lid) or inside

the luggage compartment near the

tail lamps.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

144

Keep vehicle doors and

luggage compartment

locked and keep keys and remote

transmitters out of a child’s reach.

Unsupervised children could lock

themselves in the trunk and risk

injury. Children should be taught

not to play in vehicles.

On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can

rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high

temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious

heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are

particularly at risk.

REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device

must accept any interference received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is

approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could

be caused by:

•weather conditions,

•nearby radio towers,

•structures around the vehicle, or

•other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.

The remote entry system allows you to perform the following tasks using

the remote entry transmitter:

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

145

•unlock the vehicle doors.

•lock all the vehicle doors.

•open the trunk.

•activate the personal alarm.

•open all windows and moonroof

(if equipped).

•arm and disarm the perimeter

anti-theft system.

•operate the illuminated entry

feature.

•operate the memory seat/mirror/steering column/adjustable pedals

feature (if equipped).

•enable/disable the two-stage unlocking feature.

When the vehicle is armed, the interior power door lock controls and

remote interior trunk release control are disabled. These features will not

work until the vehicle is disarmed. Refer to Central locking/Two-stage

unlocking information in this chapter.

If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,

ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership to

aid in troubleshooting.

Unlocking the doors

1. Press and release to:

•unlock the driver’s door only, if the two-stage unlocking feature is

enabled.

•unlock all doors, if the two-stage unlocking feature is disabled.

•deactivate the perimeter alarm (if activated). Note: The interior lamps

will illuminate and the turn signal lamps will display two short flashes

to indicate the deactivation of the perimeter alarm. Additionally, if the

memory seat/mirror/steering column/adjustable pedals feature (if

equipped) is activated, the corresponding seat/mirror/steering

column/adjustable pedals positions will be recalled. The memory

seat/mirror/steering column/adjustable pedals feature (if equipped) will

not return to the memory position until the key is inserted into the

ignition when the easy entry/exit feature is activated.

2. Press and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

146

The remote entry system comes with an illuminated entry feature. This

feature turns on the puddle lamps and the interior lamps for 20 seconds

or until the ignition is turned to the 5 (START) position.

The inside lights will not turn off if:

•they have been turned on using the dimmer control or

•any door is open.

The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 40 minutes after

the ignition is turned to the 2 (OFF) position.

Opening all windows and moonroof (if equipped)

Press and hold for more than two seconds in order to begin opening

the windows and moonroof (if equipped).

•The control can then be released and the windows and moonroof

will complete the opening operation. Note: If the moonroof is in the

vent range, the moonroof will move to full vent.

•If any other remote entry transmitter control is pressed during the

opening operation, all window and moonroof movement will stop.

Note: The ignition must be in the 2 (OFF) position and the accessory

delay feature must be not activated in order for this feature to operate.

Locking the doors

1. Press and release to lock all the doors and arm the perimeter alarm

system (also enables the ignition tamper security system).

•Note: With the first press of the control, the turn signal lamps will

flash once to confirm the doors, trunk and hood are closed. If any

door, the trunk or the hood is open, the turn signal lamps will flash

five times.

2. Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the

doors, trunk and hood are closed.

•Note: With the second press of the control (within 3 seconds of

the first), the horn will chirp once to confirm the doors, trunk and

hood are closed. The horn will chirp twice if any of the doors, the

trunk or the hood are not properly closed (if enabled). The horn chirp

feature may be enabled/disabled by an authorized dealer or by using

the message center (if equipped). Refer to Message center in the

Driver Controls chapter for more information.

Sounding a panic alarm

Press on the remote transmitter to activate the alarm.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

147

Press a second time to deactivate the alarm. You may also

deactivate the alarm in the following ways:

•Press on the remote transmitter.

•Turn the ignition to the 4 (RUN) position.

•Wait 30 seconds for the alarm to time-out.

Opening the trunk

Press once to open the trunk.

•Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your

vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall

out or block the driver’s rear view.

Replacing the battery

The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium

battery CR2032 or equivalent.

To replace the battery:

1. Twist a thin coin between the two

halves of the remote entry

transmitter near the key ring. DO

NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER

AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE

FRONT HOUSING OF THE

REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.

2. Do not wipe off any grease on the

battery terminals on the back

surface of the circuit board.

3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when

disposing of transmitter batteries.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

148

4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry

transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery

down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing

cavity.

5. Snap the two halves back together.

Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter

to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter

should operate normally after battery replacement.

Replacing lost remote entry transmitters

If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed

because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry

transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all

remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for

reprogramming.

How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters

You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)

available before beginning this procedure.

To reprogram the remote entry

transmitters:

1. Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.

2. Put the key in the ignition.

3. Turn the key from the 1 (LOCK) position to 4 (RUN).

4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 1 (LOCK)

position and 4 (RUN). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (RUN)

position.

5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming

mode has been activated.

6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.

Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the

procedure over again.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

149

7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry

transmitter has been programmed.

8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.

9. Turn the ignition to the 1(LOCK) position after you have finished

programming all of the remote entry transmitters.

10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming

mode has been exited.

Illuminated entry

The remote entry system comes with an illuminated entry feature. This

feature turns on the interior lamps for 20 seconds or until the ignition is

turned to the 5 (START) position.

The inside lights will not turn off if:

•they have been turned on using the dimmer control or

•any door is open.

The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 40 minutes after

the ignition is turned to the 2 (OFF) position.

Autolock

The autolock feature will lock the vehicle’s doors when:

•all the doors are closed,

•the ignition is in the 4 (RUN) position,

•you shift into forward or reverse, and

•the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Relock

The autolock feature repeats when:

•either door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 4 (RUN)

position, and

•you shift into forward or reverse, and

•the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Deactivating/activating autolock

Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature activated; in order to

deactivate the feature, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer, or use

the message center (if equipped). Refer to Message center in the Driver

Controls chapter for more information.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

150

Memory seat feature

The remote entry system allows you to recall the memory

seat/mirror/steering column/adjustable pedals feature.

Press to automatically move the seat/mirror/steering

column/adjustable pedals to the desired memory position. Note: The

seat and steering column will not travel to their final position if the key

is not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.

Activating the memory feature

To activate this feature:

1. Position the seat, mirrors, steering column and adjustable pedals to

the positions you desire.

2. Press the SET control on the

driver’s door panel.

3. Within 5 five seconds, press any

control on the remote transmitter

and then press the 1 or 2 control on

the driver’s door panel to associate

with the Driver 1 or Driver 2

positions.

4. Repeat this procedure for another

remote transmitter if desired.

Deactivating the memory feature

To deactivate this feature:

1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.

2. Within 5 five seconds, press any control on the remote transmitter

which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on

the driver’s door panel again.

3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

You can use the keyless entry

keypad to:

•lock or unlock the doors without

using a key.

•open the trunk.

•recall memory seat/mirrors/steering column/adjustable pedals positions

1or2.

1 2 34567890

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

151

The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this

code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is marked on

the computer module, and is available from your authorized dealer. You

can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.

When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the

controls to ensure a good activation.

Programming a personal entry code

To create your own personal entry code:

1. Enter the factory set code.

2. Within five seconds press the 1 •2 on the keypad.

3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered

within five seconds of each other.

4. Enter a sixth digit to indicate which personality feature should be

recalled by the personal code. Note: The lock motors will cycle, locked

then unlocked.

•1•2 recalls driver personality 1.

•3•4 recalls driver personality 2.

•9•0 does not recall a driver personality.

Wait 5 seconds without pressing a keypad button in order to store a

personal entry code.

Tips:

•Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.

•Do not use five numbers in sequential order.

•The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal

code.

•If you set a personal code and store it over an existing personal code

it will erase that personal code only.

Erasing personal codes

1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code. The keyless entry keypad and

interior lights will illuminate and the driver’s door will unlock.

2. Press and release the 1 •2 within five seconds of completing Step 1.

3. Press and hold the 1 •2 for two seconds to erase the customer

programmed codes.

All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code

will work.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

152

Note: To exit programming mode, either wait 5 seconds after pressing 1

•2 on the keypad, or press the 7 •8and9•0 pads simultaneously to

lock all vehicle doors and end programming mode.

Anti-scan feature

If the wrong code has been entered several times, the keypad will go into

an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one minute and

the keypad illumination will flash.

The anti-scan feature will turn off after:

•one minute of keypad inactivity.

•pressing the UNLOCK control on the remote entry transmitter.

•the ignition is turned to the 4 (RUN) position.

Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry

To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your

personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each

other. The interior lamps will illuminate when the driver’s door is

unlocked.

To unlock all doors, press the 3 •4 control within five seconds.

To lock all doors, press the 7 •8 and the 9 •0 at the same time. The

driver’s door must be closed to lock all doors. You do not need to enter

the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps will turn off.

Recalling a memory seat/mirrors/steering column/adjustable

pedals position 1 or 2

•Unlock the vehicle using the personal entry code 1 in order to recall

memory position 1.

•Unlock the vehicle using the personal entry code 2 in order to recall

memory position 2.

Releasing the trunk with the keyless entry system

To release/open the trunk, enter the factory-set code or personal code

(driver door unlocks) and press 5 •6 within five seconds.

SECURILOCK姟PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM

SecuriLock娂passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization

system. This system is designed to prevent the engine from being started

unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of

the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start”condition.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

153

Your vehicle comes with three coded keys; additional coded keys may be

purchased from your dealer. The dealer can program your spare keys to

your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to the

Programming spare keys section in this chapter for instructions on how

to program the coded key.

Note: The SecuriLock娂passive anti-theft system is not compatible with

non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may

result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.

Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to

purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same

key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these

objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These

objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a

momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the

engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition to the 2 (OFF) position,

remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart

the engine.

Theft indicator

The theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel.

•When the ignition is in the 2 (OFF) position, the indicator will flash

once every 2 seconds if the vehicle is locked and the perimeter alarm

is armed.

If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock娂system, the indicator will flash

rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 4 (RUN) position. If

this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for

service.

Replacement keys

If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,

you will need to have your vehicle towed to a dealership. The key codes

need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be

programmed.

Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key

away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any

inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional

spare or replacement keys.

Programming spare keys

A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only

Securilock娂keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

154

will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already

operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily

accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.

If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must

take your vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer to have the spare coded

key(s) programmed.

Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.

1. Insert the first previously

programmed coded key into the

ignition from 1 (LOCK) to 4 (RUN)

(maintain ignition in the 4 (RUN)

position for at least three seconds,

but no more than ten seconds).

2. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)

position and remove the first coded

key from the ignition.

3. Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position,

insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and

turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 4 (RUN) position

(maintain ignition in the 4 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but

no more than ten seconds).

4. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the second

coded key from the ignition.

5. Within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)

position, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the

ignition and turn the ignition from 1 (LOCK) to 4 (RUN) (maintain

ignition in the 4 (RUN) position for at least three seconds). This step

will program your new key to a coded key.

6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait at least twenty

seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.

If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and

the theft indicator will flash on and off. You may repeat Steps 1 through

5. If failure repeats, take your vehicle to your authorized dealer in order

to have new spare key(s) programmed.

PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM

The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an

unauthorized entry to your vehicle.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

155

If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,

ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership to

aid in troubleshooting.

Arming the system

When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is

attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the

turn signal lamps and will sound the horn.

The system is ready to arm whenever key is removed from the ignition.

Any of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:

•Press the control on the remote entry transmitter.

•Press the driver or passenger interior power door lock control while

that respective door is open, then close the door.

•Lock the vehicle with the key in the driver’s door key cylinder.

•Lock the vehicle by pressing the 7 •8 and the 9 •0 on the keypad at

the same time (with the driver’s door closed).

Theft indicator

When the vehicle is locked using one of the listed methods, the theft

indicator located on the instrument panel will flash briefly every 2

seconds to indicate that the perimeter alarm system is armed.

Disarming the system

You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:

•Unlock the doors by pressing the control on your remote entry

transmitter.

•Unlock the doors with a key. Turn the key full travel (toward the front

of the vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarms.

•Unlock the doors by entering the factory-set code or any of the three

custom codes into the keyless entry keypad.

•Turn the ignition to the 4 (RUN) position with a SecuriLock娂coded

key.

Triggering the anti-theft system

The armed system will be triggered if any door, the trunk or the hood is

opened without using the key, the remote entry transmitter or valid

keypad code.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Locks and Security

156

SEATING

Notes:

Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the

seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the

event of a collision.

Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of

injury in a collision or sudden stop.

Adjustable head restraints

Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.

Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as

possible behind your head.

The head restraints can be moved

up and down.

Push control to lower head restraint.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

157

Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)

The lumbar control is located on the

front of the seat cushion.

Turn to adjust lumbar support.

Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)

The power lumbar control is located

on the outboard side of the seat.

Press the front of the control to

increase firmness.

Press the back of the control to

decrease firmness.

Adjusting the power seats

The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of each seat.

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is

moving.

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap

belt snug and low across the hips.

Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the

seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the

event of a collision.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

158

Rotate the vertical control to adjust

the seatback.

•Driver

•Passenger

Slide the control forward or

backward to move the seat forward

or backward.

•Driver

•Passenger

Move the control up or down to

move the seat up and down.

•Driver

•Passenger

Move front/rear of control up or

down to tilt the front/rear of the

seat cushion.

•Driver

Easy entry/easy exit feature (if equipped)

This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat backward 5 cm (2

inches) when the key is removed from the ignition cylinder.

The seat will move 5 cm (2 inches) forward (to the original position)

when the key is placed in the ignition cylinder.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

159

Deactivating/activating the easy entry/easy exit feature

The easy entry/easy exit feature can be turned off or on through the

vehicle message center (if equipped). If your vehicle does not have a

message center, the feature can be turned off or on by your dealer.

Memory seats/steering column/mirrors/adjustable pedals

(if equipped)

This system allows automatic

positioning of the driver seat,

adjustable pedals, outside rearview

mirrors, and power adjusted

tilt/telescope steering column to two

programmable positions.

The memory seat control is located

on the driver door.

•To program position one, move

the driver seat, steering column,

exterior mirrors, and adjustable pedals to the desired positions using

the associated controls. Press the SET control. The SET control light

will briefly illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1.

•To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control

A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park

(automatic transmission). A memory seat position may be programmed

at any time.

The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote

entry transmitter UNLOCK control and the transmitter is programmed to

a memory seat position or when you enter a valid customer code 1 or 2

on the keypad.

To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to

Remote entry system in the Locks and security chapter..

Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not

in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.

Climate controlled seats operation

The controls for the climate controlled seats are located on the dual

electronic automatic temperature control (DEATC) system. Refer to

Climate controls for more information.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

160

Climate controlled seats air filter replacement

The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be

replaced periodically. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for

more information.

•There is a filter located under

each front seat.

•They can be accessed from the

second row seat. Move the front

seats all the way forward and up

to ease access.

To remove an air filter:

•Remove key from ignition.

•Push up on the outside rigid edge

of the filter and rotate toward the

front of the vehicle once tabs are

released.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

161

•Remove filter.

To install a filter:

•First, position the filter in it’s

housing making sure that the far

forward end is all the way up in

the housing. Then push in on the

center of the outside edge of the

filter and rotate up into the

housing until it clips into position.

REAR SEATS

Adjustable rear head restraints (if equipped)

Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.

Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as

possible behind your head.

The head restraints can be moved

up and down.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

162

Push control to lower head restraint.

Rear heated seats (if equipped)

•Push the indicated side of the

button for low heat.

•Push again to deactivate.

•Push the indicated side of the

button for high heat.

•Push again to deactivate.

The heated seats will activate when the ignition is in the RUN position.

When activated, they will turn off automatically after 10 minutes or when

the ignition is turned to the OFF position.

The indicator lights will illuminate when each heated seat has been

activated.

Split-folding rear seatbacks

One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional

cargo space.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

163

To lower the seatback(s), pull the

release handle(s) located inside the

trunk.

Fold the seatback(s) down.

When raising the seatback(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into

place.

Make sure that the safety belts for the rear center passenger is properly

routed over the rear seatback.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS

Personal Safety System

The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal

crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further

reduce the risk of air bag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze

different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the

appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in

a variety of frontal crash situations.

Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of the following items:

•Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints

•Driver and front passenger side air bags

•Driver and passenger side air curtains (if equipped)

•Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,

and safety belt usage sensors

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

164

•Driver’s seat position sensor

•Front crash severity sensor

•Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors

•Restraint system warning light and back-up tone

•The electrical wiring for the air bags, crash sensor(s), safety belt

pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position

sensor, and indicator lights

How does the personal safety system work?

The Personal safety system can adapt the deployment strategy of your

vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant

conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides

information to the Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, the

RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both

stages of the dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints based on crash

severity and occupant conditions.

The fact that the pretensioners or air bags did not activate for both front

seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with

the system. Rather, it means the Personal safety system determined the

accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not

appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front air bags and

pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal

collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision

causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.

Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints

The dual-stage air bags offer the capability to tailor the level of air bag

inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more

common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for

the most severe impacts. Refer to Air bag supplemental restraints

section in this chapter.

Front crash severity sensor

The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the

severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable

information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This

allows your Personal safety system to distinguish between different levels

of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual-stage

air bags and safety belt pretensioners.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

165

Driver’s seat position sensor

The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal safety system to

tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage air bag based on seat

position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting

close to the driver air bag by providing a lower air bag output level.

Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a

rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must

use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the

way back.

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

Front safety belt usage sensors

The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and

front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information

allows your Personal safety system to tailor the air bag deployment and

safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.

Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.

Front safety belt pretensioners

The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are

designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body

during a frontal or near-frontal collision. This maximizes the effectiveness

of the safety belts to improve protection. The safety belt pretensioners

can be either activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity,

together with the air bags.

Front safety belt energy management retractors

The front safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be

pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in

response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the

risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load

on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature section in this

chapter.

Determining if the Personal safety system is operational

The Personal safety system uses a warning light in the instrument cluster

or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the

Warning light section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine

maintenance of the Personal safety system is not required.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

166

The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits

and the circuits for the air bag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),

safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and driver seat

position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints

warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is

indicated by one or more of the following.

•The warning light will either flash or stay lit.

•The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is

turned on.

•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat

periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal

safety system serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician

immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in

the event of a collision.

Safety restraints precautions

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap

belt snug and low across the hips.

To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back

seat where they can be properly restrained.

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the

vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from

injury in a collision.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to

ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and

safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

safety belt properly.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

167

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a safety belt.

Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt

assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that

are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the

outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)

Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.

3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been

closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check

seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.

Combination lap and shoulder belts

1. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to

the direction the tongue is coming

from) until you hear a snap and feel

it latch. Make sure the tongue is

securely fastened in the buckle.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

168

2. To unfasten, push the release

button and remove the tongue from

the buckle.

Energy management feature

•This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management

feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce

the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.

•This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay

out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help

reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.

BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if

the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor”feature or

any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked

according to the procedures in Workshop Manual.

Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase

the risk of injury in collisions.

The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are

combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat

safety belts have two types of locking modes.

Vehicle sensitive mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length

adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle

movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner

sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5

mph) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce

forward movement of the driver and passengers.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

169

Automatic locking mode

How to use the automatic locking mode

•Buckle the combination lap and

shoulder belt.

•Grasp the shoulder portion and

pull downward until the entire

belt is pulled out.

•Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking

sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking

mode.

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will

still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic

locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.

This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in the

vehicle. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in

the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children

or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.

How to disengage the automatic locking mode

Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract

completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and return to the

vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

170

After any vehicle collision, the combination lap and shoulder belt

system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by a

qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”

feature for child seats is still functioning properly, in addition to other

checks for proper seat belt system function.

BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if

the safety belt assembly “automatic locking retractor”feature or

any other safety belt function is not operating properly. In addition, all

safety belts should be checked for proper function. Failure to replace

the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in

collisions.

Safety belt pretensioner

Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and

front outboard passenger seating positions.

The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing

from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same

crash sensor system as the front air bag supplemental restraint system

(SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap

and shoulder belt is tightened. The driver and front passenger seat belt

system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be

replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in

deployment of front air bags and safety belt pretensioners. Refer to the

Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter.

Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above

conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of

a collision.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

171

Front safety belt height adjustment

Adjust the height of the shoulder

belt so the belt rests across the

middle of your shoulder.

To adjust the shoulder belt height,

push the button and slide the height

adjuster up or down. Release the

button and pull down on the height

adjuster to make sure it is locked in

place.

Position the safety belt

height adjusters so that the

belt rests across the middle of

your shoulder. Failure to adjust

the safety belt properly could

reduce the effectiveness of the

seat belt and increase the risk of

injury in a collision.

Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a

chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.

Conditions of operation

If... Then...

The driver’s safety belt is not

buckled before the ignition switch

is turned to the RUN position...

The safety belt warning light

illuminates 1-2 minutes and the

warning chime sounds 4-8

seconds.

The driver’s safety belt is buckled

while the indicator light is

illuminated and the warning chime

is sounding...

The safety belt warning light and

warning chime turn off.

The driver’s safety belt is buckled

before the ignition switch is turned

to the RUN position...

The safety belt warning light and

indicator chime remain off.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

172

BeltMinder

The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt

warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the

driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently

sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the

instrument cluster.

If... Then...

The driver’s safety belt is not

buckled approximately 5

seconds after the safety belt

warning light has turned off...

The BeltMinder feature is activated -

the safety belt warning light

illuminates and the warning chime

sounds for 6 seconds every 30

seconds, repeating for approximately

5 minutes or until safety belt is

buckled.

The driver’s safety belt is

buckled while the safety belt

indicator light is illuminated

and the safety belt warning

chime is sounding...

The BeltMinder feature will not

activate.

The driver’s safety belt is

buckled before the ignition

switch is turned to the ON

position...

The BeltMinder feature will not

activate.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

173

The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:

(All statistics based on U.S. data)

Reasons given... Consider...

“Crashes are rare events”36700 crashes occur every day. The

more we drive, the more we are

exposed to “rare”events, even for

good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be

seriously injured in a crash during

our lifetime.

“I’m not going far”3of4fatal crashes occur within 25

miles (40 km) of home.

“Belts are uncomfortable”We design our safety belts to enhance

comfort. If you are uncomfortable -

try different positions for the safety

belt upper anchorage and seatback

which should be as upright as

possible; this can improve comfort.

“I was in a hurry”Prime time for an accident.

BeltMinder reminds us to take a few

seconds to buckle up.

“Safety belts don’t work”Safety belts, when used properly,

reduce risk of death to front seat

occupants by 45% in cars, and by

60% in light trucks.

“Traffic is light”Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in

single-vehicle crashes, many when

no other vehicles are around.

“Belts wrinkle my clothes”Possibly, but a serious crash can do

much more than wrinkle your clothes,

particularly if you are unbelted.

“The people I’m with don’t

wear belts”

Set the example, teen deaths occur 4

times more often in vehicles with

TWO or MORE people. Children and

younger brothers/sisters imitate

behavior they see.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

174

Reasons given... Consider...

“I have an air bag”Air bags offer greater protection when

used with safety belts. Frontal airbags

are not designed to inflate in rear and

side crashes or rollovers.

“I’d rather be thrown clear”Not a good idea. People who are

ejected are 40 times more likely

to DIE. Safety belts help prevent

ejection, WE CAN’T“PICK OUR

CRASH”.

Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt

Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of

injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt

Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.

One time disable

Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an

ignition ON cycle, the BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle

only.

Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature

Read steps1-9thoroughly before proceeding with the

deactivation/activation programming procedure.

The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the

following procedure:

Before following the procedure, make sure that:

•The parking brake is set

•The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)

•The ignition switch is in the OFF position

•All vehicle doors are closed

•The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled

•The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped

with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure.)

To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt

Minder feature while driving the vehicle.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

175

1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT

START THE ENGINE)

2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2

minutes)

•Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will

have to be repeated.

3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the

safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder

warning activation.

4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps.

5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the

safety belt unbuckled.

•After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three

seconds.

6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,

buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.

•This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable

BeltMinder if it is currently disabled.

7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety

belt warning light four times per second for three seconds.

8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety

belt warning light four times per second for three seconds, followed by

three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then followed by

flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three

seconds again.

9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is

complete.

Safety belt extension assembly

If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch (20

cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number

611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.

Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety

belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on

the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too

short for you when fully extended.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

176

Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt

across the torso.

Safety belt maintenance

Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work

properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure

there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt

assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle

assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder

belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if

equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching

hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company

recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in

a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a

qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and

continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety

belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and

replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt

assembly under the above conditions could result in severe

personal injuries in the event of a collision.

Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.

AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

PULL

AUTO

RESUME

SET

CANCEL

MUTE

VOL

MEDIA

INT

OFF

MIST

BRAKE

100

120

140

160

120

160

200

240

km/h

RPMX1000

RESET

MPH

SEEK

MUTE

VOL

PUSH ON

CDTAPEEJ

BASS

TREB

SEL

BAL

FADE

TUNESCANAUTO

AMFM

REW

SIDE 1-2

COMP

SHUFF

RDS

AUTO OFF

A/C

EXT

F C

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

177

Important SRS precautions

The SRS is designed to work with

the safety belt to help protect the

driver and right front passenger

from certain upper body injuries. Air

bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is

a risk of injury from a deploying air

bag.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)

recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)

between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.

Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air

bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.

To properly position yourself away from the air bag:

•Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

•Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.

Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing

objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those

objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing

serious injury.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

178

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag

supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or

Lincoln Mercury dealer.

Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle

(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow

hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing

the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.

Children and air bags

Children must always be properly

restrained. Accident statistics

suggest that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear

seating positions than in the front

seating position. Failure to follow

these instructions may increase the

risk of injury in a collision.

Air bags can kill or injure a

child in a child seat.

NEVER place a rear-facing child

seat in front of an active air bag. If

you must use a forward-facing

child seat in the front seat, move

the seat all the way back.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

179

How does the safety belt pretensioner and air bag supplemental

restraint system work?

The safety belt pretensioner and air

bag SRS are designed to activate

when the vehicle sustains

longitudinal deceleration sufficient

to cause the sensors to close an

electrical circuit that initiates

pretensioner activation and air bag

inflation.

The fact that the pretensioners and

air bags did not activate in a

collision does not mean that

something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were

not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Front air bags and

pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal and near-frontal

collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless the collision

causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.

The air bags inflate and deflate

rapidly upon activation. After air bag

deployment, it is normal to notice a

smoke-like, powdery residue or

smell the burnt propellant. This may

consist of cornstarch, talcum

powder (to lubricate the bag) or

sodium compounds (e.g., baking

soda) that result from the

combustion process that inflates the

air bag. Small amounts of sodium

hydroxide may be present which

may irritate the skin and eyes, but

none of the residue is toxic.

While the system is designed to help

reduce serious injuries, contact with

a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary

hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable

force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,

facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

180

are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time

of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be

properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while

maintaining vehicle control.

Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not

touch them after inflation.

If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function

again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not

replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a

collision.

The SRS consists of:

•driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and

air bags)

•side air bags. Refer to Side air bag system later in this chapter

•safety belt pretensioners

•one or more impact and safing sensors

•a readiness light and tone

•and the electrical wiring which connects the components

The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the

supplemental air bag electrical system wiring (including the impact

sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air

bag back up power, the air bag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to

indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness

section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the

air bag is not required.

Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the

following:

•The readiness light will either

flash or stay lit

•The readiness light will not

illuminate immediately after

ignition is turned to the RUN position

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

181

•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat

periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced

at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless

serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a

collision.

Side air bag system

Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag

cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front

seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying air bag. Failure

to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in

the event of a collision.

Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat

covers may prevent the deployment of the side air bags and

increase the risk of injury in an accident.

Do not lean your head on the door. The side air bag could injure

you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag SRS, its

fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an air bag. See your

Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.

All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts

even when an air bag SRS is provided.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

182

How does the side air bag system work?

The side air bag system consists of

the following:

•An inflatable nylon bag (air bag)

with a gas generator concealed

behind the outboard bolster of

the driver and front passenger

seatbacks.

•A special seat cover designed to

allow air bag deployment.

•The same warning light,

electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front air bags.

•Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats,

attached near the floor.

Side air bags, in combination with seat belts, can help reduce the risk of

severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.

The side air bags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the

front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air bag on the side affected

by the collision will be inflated, even if the respective seat is not

occupied. The air bag was designed to inflate between the door panel

and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in

side impact collisions.

The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral

deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit

that initiates air bag inflation.

The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that

something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were

not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side air bags are designed

to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or

near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral

deceleration.

Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not

touch them after inflation.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

183

If the side air bag has

deployed, the air bag will

not function again. The side

air bag system (including the

seat) must be inspected and

serviced by a qualified

technician in accordance with

the vehicle service manual. If

the air bag is not replaced, the

unrepaired area will increase the

risk of injury in a collision.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to

indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness

section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the

air bag is not required.

Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the

following:

•The readiness light (same light as used for front air bag system) will

either flash or stay lit.

•The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is

turned to the RUN position.

•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat

periodically until the problem and light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced

at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless

serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a

collision.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

184

Side air curtain system (if equipped)

Do not place objects or

mount equipment on or

near the airbag cover on the side

of the seatbacks of the front seats

or in front seat areas that may

come into contact with a

deploying airbag. Failure to follow

these instructions may increase

the risk of personal injury in the

event of a collision.

Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the

headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a

deploying side air curtain. Failure to follow these instructions may

increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.

Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the side air

curtain cover.

Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure

you as it deploys from the seat.

Do not lean your head on the door. The side air curtain could

injure you as it deploys from the headliner.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

185

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the side air curtain

system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a

vehicle containing a side air curtain. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury

dealer.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag

supplemental restraint system, its fuses, or the seat cover on a

seat containing an air bag. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

wear their safety belts even when an inflatable curtain is

provided.

To reduce the risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in

the deployment of the inflatable curtain.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

186

How does the side air curtain system work?

The design and development of the

side air curtain system included

recommended testing procedures

that were developed by a group of

automotive safety experts known as

the Side Airbag Technical Working

Group. These recommended testing

procedures help reduce the risk of

injuries related to the deployment of

side air bags (including side air

curtain systems).

The side air curtain system consists

of the following:

•An inflatable nylon curtain with a

gas generator concealed behind

the headliner and above the

doors.

•The headliner will flex to open

above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment.

•The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used

for the front airbags.

•Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats,

attached near the floor.

•Two crash sensors located at the base of the “C”pillars above the

wheel house.

•An inflatable nylon bag (airbag) with a gas generator concealed behind

the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks.

•A special seat cover to allow airbag deployment (front seats only).

Side air curtains and side air bags, in combination with seat belts, can

help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side

impact collision.

The side air curtains are mounted to the sheet metal above the first and

second row seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air curtain and

seat-mounted side air bag on the side affected by the collision will be

inflated, even if the respective seat is not occupied. The air curtain was

designed to inflate between the side window area and occupant to

further enhance the head protection provided to occupants in side

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

187

impact collisions. The seat-mounted side air bag was designed to inflate

between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection

provided occupants in side impact collision.

The side air curtain system SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle

sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an

electrical circuit that initiates air curtain and seat-mounted side air bag

inflation.

The fact that the side air curtain and seat-mounted side air bag did not

inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the

system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to

cause activation. The side air curtain system is designed to inflate in side

impact collisions, not roll-over, rear impact, frontal or near-frontal

collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.

Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not

touch them after inflation.

If the side air curtain has

deployed, the air curtain

will not function again. The

side air curtain system

(including the A, B and C

pillar trim and headliner) must

be inspected and serviced by a

qualified technician in

accordance with the vehicle

service manual. If the air curtain

is not replaced, the unrepaired

area will increase the risk of injury

in a collision.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to

indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness

section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the

air bag is not required.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

188

Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the

following:

•The readiness light (same light as used for front air bag system) will

either flash or stay lit.

•The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is

turned to the RUN position.

•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat

periodically until the problem and light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced

at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless

serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a

collision.

Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including

pretensioners)

See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE

disposed of by qualified personnel.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN

See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety

restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system

(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.

Important child restraint precautions

You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.

and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old

or younger and who weigh 40 lbs[18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you

must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states

require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight

years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific

requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When

possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your

vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the

vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from

injury in a collision.

Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or

child restraint you might use.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

189

Children and safety belts

If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children

who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety

seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.

Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that

apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can

be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or

neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child

closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt

fit.

Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in

your vehicle.

Child booster seats

Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh

40 pounds (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the

lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too

small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk

of serious injury.

To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who

have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use

of a belt-positioning booster.

Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the

child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees

bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better

and more comfortably for growing children.

When children should use booster seats

Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the

toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and

lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about

80 lbs (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

190

Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these

questions:

•Can the child sit all the way back

against the vehicle seat back with

knees bent comfortably at the

edge of the seat without

slouching?

•Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?

•Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?

•Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

Types of booster seats

There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:

•Those that are backless.

If your backless booster seat has a

removable shield, remove the

shield and use the lap/shoulder

belt. If a seating position has a

low seat back and no head

restraint, a backless booster seat

may place your child’s head (top

of ear level) above the top of the

seat. In this case, move the

backless booster to another

seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.

•Those with a high back.

If, with a backless booster seat,

you cannot find a seating position

that adequately supports your

child’s head, a high back booster

seat would be a better choice.

Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with

lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs (18 kg).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

191

The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of

the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,

never up high across the stomach.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh

sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this

condition.

The importance of shoulder belts

Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s

head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should

never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster

seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children

to ride.

Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the

booster seat.

Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the

back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of

the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.

Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can

slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a

collision.

SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN

Child and infant or child safety seats

Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the

child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the

safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the

safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or

collision.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

192

When installing a child safety seat:

•Review and follow the information

presented in the Air Bag

Supplemental Restraint System

section in this chapter.

•Use the correct safety belt buckle

for that seating position.

•Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle until you hear a

snap and feel it latch. Make sure

the tongue is securely fastened in

the buckle.

•Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety

seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,

to prevent accidental unbuckling.

•Place seat back in upright position.

•Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic

locking mode.

•LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48

pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used

for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to

provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)

using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.

Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether

strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and

tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,

refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For

more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this

chapter.

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included

with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install

and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden

stop or collision.

Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed

in the front seats.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

193

Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder

belts

Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a

rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must

use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the

way back.

Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear

seat whenever possible.

1. Position the child safety seat in a

seat with a combination lap and

shoulder belt.

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt

and then grasp the shoulder belt

and lap belt together.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

194

3. While holding the shoulder and

lap belt portions together, route the

tongue through the child seat

according to the child seat

manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure

the belt webbing is not twisted.

4. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to

the direction the tongue is coming

from) for that seating position until

you hear a snap and feel the latch

engage. Make sure the tongue is

latched securely by pulling on it.

5. To put the retractor in the

automatic locking mode, grasp the

shoulder portion of the belt and pull

downward until all of the belt is

pulled out and a click is heard.

6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it

is in the automatic locking mode.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

195

7. Pull the lap belt portion across

the child seat toward the buckle and

pull up on the shoulder belt while

pushing down with your knee on the

child seat.

8. Allow the safety belt to retract to

remove any slack in the belt.

9. Before placing the child in the

seat, forcibly move the seat forward

and back to make sure the seat is

securely held in place. To check

this, grab the seat at the belt path

and attempt to move it side to side

and forward. There should be no

more than one inch of movement for

proper installation.

10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is

in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt

out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps

two through nine.

Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.

Attaching child safety seats with tether straps

Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which

goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether

straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact

the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a

tether strap.

The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap

anchors located behind the seats as described below.

The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked

with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

196

The tether strap anchors in your

vehicle are in the following positions

(shown from top view):

Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as

shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached

somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.

1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.

2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.

For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under

the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route

the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Locate the correct anchor for the

selected seating position.

4. Open the tether anchor cover.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

197

5. Clip the tether strap to the

anchor as shown.

If the tether strap is clipped

incorrectly, the child safety

seat may not be retained properly

in the event of a collision.

6. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety

belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.

7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child

being injured in a collision greatly increases.

Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children) attachments for child seat anchors

Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments

that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.

This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the

child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be

attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with

tether straps in this chapter.

Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating

positions marked with the child seat symbol.

The anchors on both sides of the

center of the rear seat are provided

primarily for child seats at the

outboard seats, and are further

apart than the pairs of lower

anchors for child seat installation at

other seats. A child seat with rigid

LATCH attachments cannot be

installed at the center rear seat. A

child seat with LATCH attachments on belt webbing can be used at the

center rear seat unless a child seat at an outboard rear seat is attached

to one of these lower anchors. Install a child seat onto the lower anchors

at the center rear seat ONLY IF the child restraint manufacturer

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

198

recommends that the child seat can be installed to anchors that are

spaced up to 500 mm (20 in) apart.

Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.

In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two

child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or

death.

The lower anchors for child seat installation are recessed at the rear

section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back. The inboard

LATCH anchors are located below and behind the locator symbols on the

seat back. The outboard LATCH anchors are 11 inches (280 mm)

outboard of the locator symbols.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

199

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions to properly install a

child seat with LATCH attachments.

Two plastic LATCH guides can be

obtained at no charge from any

Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

They snap onto the LATCH lower

anchors in the seat to help attach a

child seat with rigid attachments.

The guides hold the seat trim away

to expose the anchor and make it

easier to attach some child seats.

Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the

anchors shown.

If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten

the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion

when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without

lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the

vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.

Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly

attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child

seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if

the anchors hold the seat in place.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child

being injured in a crash greatly increases.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

200

STARTING

Positions of the ignition

1. LOCK, locks the gearshift lever

and allows key removal. (The

steering wheel will not lock after

key removal.)

2. OFF, shuts off the engine and all

accessories without locking the

steering wheel. This position also

allows the automatic transmission

shift lever to be moved from the P

(Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed.

When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the

automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted

vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.

3. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to

operate while the engine is not running.

4. RUN, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key

position when driving.

5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine

starts.

Preparing to start your vehicle

Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This

system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard

requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio

noise.

When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before

or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty

starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to

Starting the engine in this chapter.

Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high

temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk

of fire or other damage.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

201

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry

ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine

compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed

areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door

before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in

this chapter for more instructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer

inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell

exhaust fumes.

Important safety precautions

When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If

the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle

checked.

Before starting the vehicle:

1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more

information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating

and Safety Restraints chapter.

2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.

•Make sure the parking brake is

set.

•Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

202

•Turn the key to 4 (ON) without

turning the key to 5 (START).

Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a

light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.

•If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate.

Starting the engine

Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the

engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.

1. Turn the key to 5 (START)

without pressing the accelerator

pedal and release as soon as the

engine starts. The key will return to

4 (RUN).

Note: If the engine does not start

within five seconds on the first try,

turn the key to 3 (OFF), wait 10

seconds and try again. If engine still fails to start, press the accelerator

to the floor and try again: this will allow the engine to crank with the

fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel.

2. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator

pedal gradually as the engine speeds up.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

203

3. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and

drive.

Using the engine block heater (if equipped)

An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting

and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is

strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach

-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three

hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night

before starting the vehicle.

To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater

with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)

adapters.

Guarding against exhaust fumes

Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid

its dangerous effects.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer

inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell

exhaust fumes.

Important ventilating information

If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of

time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating

or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.

BRAKES

Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding

or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out

and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle

has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,

the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.

Refer to Brake system warning

light in the Instrument Cluster

chapter for information on the brake

system warning light.

Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This

system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by

BRAKE

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

204

keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and

brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking; this is

normal and should be no reason for concern.

ABS warning lamp

The ABS lamp in the instrument

cluster momentarily illuminates

when the ignition is turned on. If

the light does not illuminate during

start up, remains on or flashes, the

ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.

Even when the ABS is disabled,

normal braking is still effective. (If

your BRAKE warning lamp

illuminates with the parking brake

released, have your brake system

serviced immediately.)

Using ABS

When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake

pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the

effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping

distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain

full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.

However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.

Parking brake

To set the parking brake, pull the lever up. To release the parking brake,

make sure the ignition is turned to ON, depress the brake pedal, then

gently push the parking brake lever down.

ABS

BRAKE

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

205

The BRAKE warning lamp will

illuminate and will remain

illuminated until the parking brake

is released.

The parking brake will automatically disengage when the gearshift lever

is moved from P (Park) with the ignition in the ON position or if the

engine is running. The parking brake will also disengage if a gear is

selected and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

If the battery is disconnected (or removed), it will be necessary to reset

the parking brake; the message center will display APPLY PARK BRAKE

followed by FOOT ON BRAKE or APPLY ((P)) followed by FOOT BRK.

With the ignition on and the engine not running, depress the brake pedal

and apply the parking brake. The brake lamp will illuminate; this is

normal and the parking brake is now reset. To release the parking brake,

push the lever down with your foot on the brake pedal.

If there is a failure in the parking brake system, the amber warning light

on the parking brake control will illuminate. See your dealer or a

qualified technician for service on the parking brake system.

STEERING

To prevent damage to the power steering system:

•Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it

stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.

•Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level

(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).

If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned

off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

•an improperly inflated tire

•uneven tire wear

•loose or worn suspension components

•loose or worn steering components

•improper steering alignment

A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering

seem to wander/pull.

BRAKE

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

206

Speed sensitive steering

The steering in your vehicle is speed sensitive. At high speeds, steering

assist will decrease to improve steering feel. At lower speeds,

maneuverability will be increased.

If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while

driving at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system

checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician.

TRACTION CONTROL姟

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control娂system. This

system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle,

especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads

and gravel roads. The system will allow your vehicle to make better use

of available traction in these conditions.

During Traction Control娂operation, the traction control active light will

illuminate, you may hear an electric motor type of sound coming from

the engine compartment and the engine will not “rev-up”when you push

further on the accelerator. This is normal system behavior and should be

no reason for concern.

The Traction Control娂switch,

located on the center console by the

gearshift lever, has an indicator light

that illuminates when the system is

off. The Traction Control娂system

will automatically turn on every time

the ignition is turned off and on.

If you should become stuck in snow

or ice or on a very slippery road

surface, try switching the Traction Control娂system off. This may allow

excess wheel spin to “dig”the vehicle out and enable a successful

“rocking”maneuver.

If the Traction Control system is activated excessively in a short period

of time, the brake portion of the system will shut down to allow the

brakes to cool down. A limited Traction Control function using only

engine power reduction will still help control the wheels from

over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the system will again

function normally. Anti-lock braking is not affected by this condition and

will function normally during the cool-down period.

If a system fault is detected, the traction control switch’s OFF indicator

will illuminate and your vehicle should be serviced.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

207

AdvanceTrac姟Stability Enhancement System (if equipped)

The AdvanceTrac娂system provides a stability enhancement feature as

well as a traction enhancement feature. It helps your vehicle maintain

traction, when driving on slippery and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting

and controlling wheel spin. Excessive wheel spin is controlled by

momentarily reducing engine power and rapidly applying the anti-lock

brakes. The system is a driver aid which makes your vehicle easier to

handle primarily on snow and ice-covered roads.

If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching

the AdvanceTrac娂system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac娂button.

This will allow your tires to “dig”for traction.

If the AdvanceTrac娂system is activated excessively in a short period of

time, the brake portion of the system will shut down to allow the brakes

to cool down. A limited AdvanceTrac娂function using only engine power

reduction will still help control the wheels from over-spinning. When the

brakes have cooled down, the system will again function normally.

Anti-lock braking is not affected by this condition and will function

normally during the cool-down period.

AdvanceTrac娂enhances your vehicle’s stability during maneuvers that

require all available tire traction, like in wet/snowy/icy road conditions

and/or when performing emergency maneuvers. In an emergency

lane-change, the driver will experience better overall vehicle traction,

and have better control of the vehicle.

The AdvanceTrac娂system helps the driver maintain steering control if

the vehicle begins to slide excessively left or right or spin out.

AdvanceTrac娂will attempt to correct the sliding motion by applying

brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by reducing engine

power.

Driving conditions which may activate AdvanceTrac娂include:

•Taking a turn too fast

•Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle

•Hitting a patch of ice

•Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road

•Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice

versa

•Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa

•Hitting a curb while turning

•Driving on slick surfaces

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

208

The AdvanceTrac娂system automatically turns on when the engine is

started. However, the system does not function when the vehicle is

traveling in R (Reverse); the ABS and traction enhancement features will

continue to function.

The AdvanceTrac娂button allows

the driver to control the availability

of the AdvanceTrac娂system.

AdvanceTrac娂system status is

indicated by a warning indicator

light with a “sliding car”icon in the

instrument cluster that will flash

when the system is active and an

indicator light in the control button

that will illuminate when the system

is turned off. In vehicles with a

message center, the message “ADVANCETRAC OFF”will be displayed.

If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac娂system, the warning

indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. If the warning

indicator light in the instrument cluster remains on while the engine is

running, have the system serviced immediately.

Pressing the control once will disable the AdvanceTrac娂stability

enhancement and the engine power reduction portion of the traction

enhancement feature; the brake portion of the traction enhancement

feature will still function normally. Pressing and holding the control for

more than five seconds will disable the AdvanceTrac娂stability

enhancement and traction enhancement feature. If the vehicle is stuck

in snow or mud or when driving in deep sand, switching off the

AdvanceTrac娂system may be beneficial so the wheels are allowed to

spin. If your vehicle seems to lose engine power while driving in deep

sand or very deep snow, switching off the AdvanceTrac娂stability

enhancement feature will restore full engine power and will enhance

momentum through the obstacle.

Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the

AdvanceTrac娂performs a system self-check. During AdvanceTrac娂

operation you may experience the following:

•A rumble or grinding noise

•A slight deceleration of the vehicle

•The AdvanceTrac娂indicator light will flash

•If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the

pedal.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

209

•If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the

brake pedal will move to apply higher brake forces. You may also hear

a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe

condition.

All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac娂operation.

Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s wheel/tire size, suspension

or steering; the resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can

adversely affect the AdvanceTrac娂system.

Modification/Addition of supplemental radio components, such as

a subwoofer, may adversely affect the performance of the

AdvanceTrac娂system.

Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose

control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal

injury or property damage. The occurrence of an AdvanceTrac娂event

is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their

ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If you

experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION

Brake-shift interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents

the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is

in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed.

If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in

the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed:

1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the

key.

2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift

to N (Neutral).

When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the

automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted

vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.

3. Start the vehicle.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

210

If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,

it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not

operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside

Emergencies chapter.

Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps

are working.

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is

latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and

remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp

remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.

See your dealer or a qualified service technician.

Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission

This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.

Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and

shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any

type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal

shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations

when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive

Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating

parameters. This learning process could take several transmission

upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer

shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift

scheduling will resume.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

211

P (Park)

This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from

turning.

To put your vehicle in gear:

•Start the engine

•Depress the brake pedal

•Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear

To put your vehicle in P (Park):

•Come to a complete stop

•Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is

latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and

remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

R (Reverse)

With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R

(Reverse).

N (Neutral)

With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is

free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.

Drive 5 (Overdrive)

The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission

operates in gears one through five.

Drive 4 (Overdrive cancelled)

Activated when the transmission shift lever is moved to the D4 position.

•This position allows for all forward gears 1–4, except overdrive.

•Provides engine braking.

•Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to

other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads and when

engine braking is required.

•To return to D5 (overdrive mode), move the transmission shift lever

into the D5 position.

•Select D4 at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift

into fourth gear.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

212

3 (Third)

This position allows for third gear only.

•Provides engine braking.

•To return to D5 or D4, move the transmission shift lever into the D5

or D4 position.

•Selecting 3 (Third) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to

downshift to third gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.

2 (Second)

This position allows for second gear only.

•Provides engine braking.

•Use to start-up on slippery roads.

•To return to D5 or D4, move the transmission shift lever into the D5,

D4 or 3 (Third) position.

•Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to

downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.

1 (First)

This position allows for first gear only.

•Provides maximum engine braking.

•Will not downshift into first gear at high speeds; will cause the

transmission to downshift to a lower gear, then allows for first gear

when the vehicle reaches slower speeds.

Forced downshifts

•Allowed in Overdrive or Drive.

•Depress the accelerator to the floor.

•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.

Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission with the Select

Shift Transmission (SST) shifter (if equipped)

Understanding gearshift positions

The Select Shift Transmission (SST) shifter allows the driver to select

between the transmission’s automatic shift mode or the manually

selected shift mode.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

213

Automatic shift mode

Operates like a normal automatic

transmission for P (Park), R

(Reverse), N (Neutral), D5 and D4.

Refer to Driving with a 5–speed

automatic transmission in this

chapter for P (Park), R (Reverse),

N (Neutral), D5 and D4 information.

Manual shift mode

With the gearshift lever in D5

(Overdrive), the gearshift lever can

be moved to the right and into the

manual shift mode. The transmission

will remain in the manual shift mode

until the gearshift lever is moved

back to D5 (Overdrive).

+ and - position operation

These positions allow the driver to

manually select the appropriate

upshift (+) or downshift (-) and

gear range.

•Can only be entered from the D5

position.

•Gear ranges 1–5 provide the same

function and ratio as found in the

D5 or D4 automatic mode

positions.

•Transmission will not upshift or downshift unless the selector lever is

moved forward or rearward.

•One tap forward (+) will command the transmission to upshift one

gear range.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

214

•One tap rearward (-) will command the transmission to downshift one

gear range.

•Upshifts are allowed at any vehicle speed, with the exception of 4th

and 5th gear. The transmission will not do a 4th or 5th gear start.

Ensure that the transmission is returned to 1st gear once the vehicle

is stopped. If this is not done, and the transmission is in 2nd or 3rd

gear, the vehicle will remain in that gear. However, if the transmission

is in 4th or 5th gear, the transmission will automatically return to 1st

gear.

•When downshifting at normal road speeds, the transmission will only

allow a downshift into the next lower gear.

•If shifter (-) is tapped more than once in rapid succession, the

transmission will downshift only into the next lower gear, then when

the vehicle reaches a speed below a calibrated entry speed, the

transmission will allow a downshift into the next lower gear if again

selected by the driver. This is to prevent engine and transmission

damage and to keep the engine and transmission within allowable

RPM ranges.

•An electronic indicator on the instrument cluster will display the

selected gear.

Recommended shift speeds

Upshift according to the following chart:

Recommended upshift schedule

Shift from:

1 - 2 15 mph (24 km/h)

2 - 3 25 mph (40 km/h)

3 - 4 40 mph (64 km/h)

4 - 5 45 mph (72 km/h)

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by

shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a

steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating

temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.

Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the

transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

215

REAR PARK ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)

The rear park assist system sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles

near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) gear is selected.

To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the

limitations of the rear park assist system as contained in this

section. The park assist is only an aid for some (generally large and

fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking

speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the system;

this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R

(Reverse) and when using the rear park assist.

This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or

moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to

assist the driver in detecting objects to avoid damaging the vehicle.

The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to

the ground.

Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or

surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal

detection zone of the Rear Park Assist system may create false beeps.

The system will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the

vehicle slowly moves in reverse at speeds less than 6 mph (10 km/h).

The system is not effective at speeds greater than 6 mph (10 km/h) and

may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

216

The system detects obstacles within approximately 16 feet (5 meters), at

speeds above 2 mph [3 km/h]), behind the rear bumper with a decreased

coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. If the vehicle speed is

below 2 mph [3 km/h]), the system will detect objects up to 10 feet (3

meters) behind the vehicle with a decreased coverage area at the outer

corners of the bumper. In the figure, the smaller objects behind the

vehicle represent the near-vehicle and bumper corner coverage area of

the park aid system and the large object represents the extended

coverage area. As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone

increases. When the distance to the obstacle is less than 18 inches (45.0

cm), the tone will sound continuously. If the system detects an object

that is approaching the vehicle at such as rate that rapid braking is

required, a very high rate tone will sound. If this tone is heard while

reversing, the driver is advised to slow down immediately until the tone

either changes to a slower rate or stops. While receiving a warning the

radio volume will be reduced to a predetermined level. After the warning

goes away, the radio will return to the previous volume. The radio

volume may be overridden using the radio volume control.

The rear park assist is automatically

enabled when the gear selector is

placed in R (Reverse) and the

ignition is ON. A park assist control

allows the driver to disable the

system only when the ignition is

ON, and the gear selector is in R

(Reverse).

The OFF indicator remains

illuminated when the system is

disabled. Press the control to

disable or enable the system. Once disabled, the system will remain

disabled until the control is pressed or until the next ignition cycle.

The indicator will remain illuminated to indicate a failure of the rear park

assist.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

217

Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free

from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the

sensors with sharp objects). These elements may cause the

system to operate inaccurately.

If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving

it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing

inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very

slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through

water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the

bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). When driving through water,

traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your

engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may

stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent

tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and

cause internal transmission damage.

Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your

vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.

VEHICLE LOADING –WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or

trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating

capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will

provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading

your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining

your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s

Safety Certification Label and Tire Label:

Base Curb Weight –is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of

fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or

optional equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight –is the weight of your new vehicle when you

picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

218

Cargo Weight –includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,

including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load

or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) –is the total weight placed on each axle

(front and rear) –including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) –is the maximum allowable

weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label

located on the driver’s door or door pillar. The total load on each

axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits

could result in substandard vehicle handling, performance,

engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the

vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.

Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in

this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your

dealership.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

219

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) –is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +

passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating) –is the maximum

allowable weight of the fully loaded

vehicle (including all options,

equipment, passengers and cargo).

The GVWR is shown on the

Safety Compliance Certification

Label located on the driver’s

door or door pillar. The GVW

must never exceed the GVWR.

Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits

could result in substandard vehicle handling, performance,

engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the

vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

220

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) –is the weight of the loaded vehicle

(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) –is the maximum allowable

weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer –including all cargo and

passengers –that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.

(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at

GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe

control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing

vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The

GCW must never exceed the GCWR.

Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight –is the highest possible weight of a

fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only

mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of

10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel

trailer), and driver only (150 lbs [68 kg]). Consult your dealership (or

the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for

more detailed information.

Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight –refers to the amount

of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.

Examples: For a 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply

5,000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to

750 lbs. (227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lbs. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer,

multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725

to 2,875 lbs. (782 to 1,304 kg)

Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the

certification label.

Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities

than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR

and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the

originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

221

Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in

serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.

TRAILER TOWING

Your vehicle is not equipped to tow. No towing packages are available

through Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealers.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)

Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow

your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (such as behind a

recreational vehicle).

These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not

damaged due to insufficient lubrication.

All Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles:

This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel

drive capability.

•Place the transmission in N (Neutral)

•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h)

•Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km)

If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must

be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft.

Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a

qualified technician. Improper removal/installation of the

driveshaft may cause damage to the driveshaft and internal

transmission components. See your local dealer for driveshaft

removal/installation.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Driving

222

GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor

Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This

program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service

is available:

•24–hours, seven days a week

•for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000

miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury

vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln

vehicles.

Roadside assistance will cover:

•changing a flat tire

•jump-starts

•lock-out assistance

•limited fuel delivery

•towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company

dealership, or your selling dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the

nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).

Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the

mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound

towing or repossession).

Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for

information on:

•coverage period

•exact fuel amounts

•towing of your disabled vehicle

•emergency travel expense reimbursement

•travel planning benefits

USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your

wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the

Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is

mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is

found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.

U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,

call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

223

Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call

1–800–665–2006.

If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor

Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement

information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call

1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.

Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call

1–800–665–2006.

ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY

In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance

coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting

your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.

Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you

may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside

Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact

1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.

HAZARD FLASHER

The hazard flasher is located on the

steering column, just behind the

steering wheel. The hazard flashers

will operate when the ignition is in

any position or if the key is not in

the ignition.

Push in the flasher control and all

front and rear direction signals will

flash. Press the flasher control again

to turn them off. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and is creating a

safety hazard for other motorists.

Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.

FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUEL

RESET

This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine

when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.

After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch

may have been activated.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

224

This switch is located in the driver’s

footwell, behind the kick panel.

To reset the switch:

1. Turn the ignition OFF.

2. Check the fuel system for leaks.

3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the

switch by pushing in on the reset

button.

4. Turn the ignition ON.

5. Wait a few seconds and return

the key to OFF.

6. Make another check for leaks.

FUSES AND RELAYS

Fuses

If electrical components in the

vehicle are not working, a fuse may

have blown. Blown fuses are

identified by a broken wire within

the fuse. Check the appropriate

fuses before replacing any electrical

components.

Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage

rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire

damage and could start a fire.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

225

Standard fuse amperage rating and color

COLOR

Fuse

rating

Mini

fuses

Standard

fuses

Maxi

fuses

Cartridge

maxi

fuses

Fuse link

cartridge

2A Grey Grey ———

3A Violet Violet ———

4A Pink Pink ———

5A Tan Tan ———

7.5A Brown Brown ———

10A Red Red ———

15A Blue Blue ———

20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue

25A Natural Natural ———

30A Green Green Green Pink Pink

40A ——Orange Green Green

50A ——Red Red Red

60A ——Blue —Yellow

70A ——Tan —Brown

80A ——Natural —Black

Passenger compartment fuse panel

The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side kick panel. Remove the

panel cover to access the fuses.

To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel

cover.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

226

The fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Passenger Compartment Fuse

Panel Description

1 5A Starter relay coil

2 5A Radio

3 5A ABS/TCS/AdvanceTrac娂

4 5A Cluster, Powertrain Control Module

(PCM) relay, Fuel pump relay, REM

5 10A Restraints Control Module (RCM)

6 10A OBD II

7 5A DDM, DSM, Anti-theft LED, Power

mirror switch, Electric Park Brake

switch, PCM

8 5A Right front turn, Right front

sidemarker, Right front park lamps

9 15A Right front low beam/HID

SEE

OWNER'S MANUAL

RELAY 1

REPLACEMENT

FUSES

FUSE 8

FUSE 9

FUSE 10

FUSE 11

FUSE 12

FUSE 13

FUSE 14

FUSE 15

FUSE 16

FUSE 17

FUSE 18

FUSE 19

FUSE 20

FUSE 21

FUSE 1

FUSE 2

FUSE 3

FUSE 4

FUSE 5

FUSE 6

FUSE 7

FUSE 22

FUSE 23

FUSE 24

FUSE 25

FUSE 26

FUSE 27

FUSE 28

FUSE 29

FUSE 30

FUSE 31

FUSE 32

FUSE 33

FUSE 34

FUSE 35

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

227

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Passenger Compartment Fuse

Panel Description

10 5A Left front turn, Left front

sidemarker, Left front park lamps

11 10A Left front high beam

12 5A Electrochromic mirror

13 5A Cluster

14 5A DATC

15 5A O/D cancel, ABS/Traction-Assist

switch

16 5A Heated seat controls, Climate

control seat module

17 5A RCM, Alternator warning lamp

18 20A Radio, CIA, Navigation unit

19 15A Tilt/Tele motors

20 10A FEM, DATC, Cluster, REM

21 7.5A Not used (spare)

22 10A DDM, Driver door mirror

23 10A Right front high beam

24 5A PATS

25 15A Left front low beam/HID

26 5A Wiper module

27 10A Radio, Navigation unit

28 5A Not Used (spare)

29 5A FEM, Reverse park assist

30 5A FEM, Passenger power mirror

31 —Not used

32 20A Cigar lighter

33 10A Switch backlighting, FEM

34 10A Not used (spare)

35 5A Stop lamp signal

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

228

Front power distribution box

The front power distribution box is

located in the engine compartment.

The power distribution box contains

high-current fuses that protect your

vehicle’s main electrical systems

from overloads.

Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current

fuses.

To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to

the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or

refilling fluid reservoirs.

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the

Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

229

The high-current fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Power Distribution Box

Description

1 10A* A/C clutch, Coolant control valve,

Auxiliary coolant pump

2—Not used

3 15A* Fog lamp

4 20A* Horn

5 15A* Fuel injectors, Electric cooling

fan, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor

6 15A* Transmission solenoid, EGR

7—Not used

8–Not used

9—Not used

10 —Not used

11 15A* HEGOs

12 15A* Coil-on-plug

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

230

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Power Distribution Box

Description

13 30A** Heated wiper park

14 30A** ABS module

15 —Not used

16 30A** Blower motor

17 —Not used

18 —Not used

19 30A** Electric park brake

20 30A** Wiper motor

21 30A** Starter solenoid

22 40A** ABS motor

23 —Not used

24 —Not used

Relay 01 —Not used

Relay 02 —Not used

Relay 03 —Coil-on-plug and HEGOs

Relay 04 —Right-hand HID headlamps

Relay 05 —Auxiliary coolant pump (V8

engines)

Relay 06 —Left-hand HID headlamps

Relay 07 —Fog lamps

Relay 08 —A/C clutch

Fuse 09 —Not used

Relay 10 —Blower motor

Relay 11 —Not used

Relay 12 —Heated wiper park

Relay 13 —Horn

Relay 14 —PCM power

Relay 15 —Starter motor

Diode —PCM

*Mini fuses **Cartridge fuses

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

231

In-line fuse for electric cooling fan

There is a 60A maxi fuse for the electric cooling fan located in a wiring

harness behind the front passenger side trim panel under the dash panel.

The trim panel must be removed and the carpet on the front passenger

side must be lifted to access this fuse. See a qualified technician to have

this fuse replaced, if necessary.

Rear power distribution box

The rear power distribution box is

located in the luggage compartment

under the spare tire well cover. The

power distribution box contains

high-current fuses that protect your

vehicle’s main electrical systems

from overloads.

Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current

fuses.

To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to

the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or

refilling fluid reservoirs.

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the

Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

232

The high-current fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Power Distribution Box

Description

1 15A* Decklid release solenoid,

Passenger door lock motors

2 10A* Right rear turn lamp, License

plate lamp

3 5A* Left rear stop/tail lamp

4 10A* Fuel door release solenoid,

Decklid lamp

5 10A* Courtesy and map lamps, Radio

antenna module

6 10A* Left rear turn and back-up lamps

7 5A* Right rear stop/tail lamp

8 5A* Center high-mounted stop lamp

9 5A* Heated mirror

10 20A* Power point - console

11 20A* Rear heated seats

12 20A* Power point - ashtray

13 —Not used

14 10A* Navigation unit

15 5A* Alternator sense

16 20A* Moonroof

123456789 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

> PBT <

MINI-FUSE

SEE OWNER'S MANUAL CONSULTER LA GUIDE

CARTRIDGE FUSE

26 27 28 29 30 31 32

10 11

RELAY

001

12 13 14 15 16 17 18

RELAY

002

RELAY

003

RELAY

004

RELAY

005 RELAY

006

RELAY

007

DIODE 01

DIODE 02

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

233

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Power Distribution Box

Description

17 15A* Fuel pump motor

18 20A* Subwoofer amp

30A* THX amp, Subwoofer amp

19 20A** REM - Left rear window

20 30A** Front window motors

21 20A** Driver lumbar, Power seats

22 20A** Ignition switch

23 30A** SSP4

24 30A** SSP3

25 40A** P-J/B

26 30A** Climate control seat module

27 30A** SSP1

28 20A** Passenger lumbar, Power seats

29 40A** Rear defroster

30 20A** REM - Right rear window

31 30A** Powertrain main power

32 30A** SSP2

Relay 001 —SSP1

Relay 002 —SSP4

Relay 003 —Rear defroster

Relay 004 —SSP3

Relay 005 —SSP2

Relay 006 —Not used

Relay 007 —Fuel pump motor

Diode 01 —Not used

Diode 02 —Fuel pump motor

*Mini fuses **Maxi fuses

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

234

CHANGING THE TIRES

If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.

Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly

and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.

The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may damage

your tires.

T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire Information

Your vehicle may be equipped with a T-type/mini-spare tire or a full-size

spare tire. The T-type/mini-spare tire will have the words “Temporary

Use Only”molded into the tire sidewall. This spare tire is considered

“temporary”. Replace the T-type/mini-spare with a tire of the same size,

speed rating and load carrying capacity as the other road tires as soon as

possible.

When driving with the T-type/mini-spare tire do not:

•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)

•Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the

Safety Compliance Label

•Tow a trailer

•Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the T-type/mini spare

tire

•Use more than one T-type/mini spare tire at a time

•Use commercial car washing equipment

•Try to repair the T-type/mini spare tire

Use of a T-type/mini spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to

impairment of the following:

•Handling, stability and braking performance

•Comfort and noise

•Ground clearance and parking at curbs

•Winter weather driving capability

•Wet weather driving capability

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

235

Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information

Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased

risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A

dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is

different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If

you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary

use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as

soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as

the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the

dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather

than repaired.

When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:

•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)

•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time

•Use commercial car washing equipment

•Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare

tire/wheel

The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the

following:

•Handling, stability and braking performance

•Comfort and noise

•Ground clearance and parking at curbs

•Winter weather driving capability

•Wet weather driving capability

•All-Wheel Driving Capability (if applicable)

•Load Leveling Adjustment (if applicable)

When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution

should be given to:

•Towing a trailer

•Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body

•Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack

Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek

service as soon as possible.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

236

Tire change procedure

To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,

be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)

the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the

vehicle) to the tire being changed.

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be

seriously injured.

1. Park on a level surface, activate

hazard flashers and set parking

brake.

2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park) ,

turn engine OFF, and block the

diagonally opposite wheel.

3. Lift the trunk cargo cover and

remove the spare tire, jack and lug

wrench.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

237

4. Loosen each wheel lug nut

one-half turn counterclockwise but

do not remove them until the wheel

is raised off the ground.

5. Put the jack in the jack notch

next to the tire you are changing.

Turn the jack handle clockwise until

the wheel is completely off the

ground.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

238

Never use the rear differential

as a jacking point.

To lessen the risk of

personal injury, do not put

any part of your body under the

vehicle while changing a tire. Do

not start the engine when your

vehicle is on the jack. The jack is

only meant for changing the tire.

6. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.

7. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is

facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub.

Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.

8. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

9. Remove the jack and fully tighten

the lug nuts in the order shown.

Refer to Wheel lug nut torque

specifications later in this chapter

for the proper lug nut torque

specification.

10. Put flat tire, jack and lug wrench

away. Make sure jack is fastened so

it does not rattle when you drive.

11. Unblock the wheels.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

239

Wheel lug nut torque specifications

Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)

after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel

removal, etc.).

Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*

lb.ft. N•m

M12 x 1.5 100 135

* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and

rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.

When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or

foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or

the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the wheel.

Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel

mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to

come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.

JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,

sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or

vehicle damage.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and

clothing, if contacted.

Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic

transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may

damage the catalytic converter.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

240

Preparing your vehicle

Your battery is located in the trunk of your vehicle.

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the

transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission

may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and

will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the

adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its

optimum shift feel.

1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.

2. Do not disconnect the battery of your disabled vehicle as this could

damage the vehicle’s electrical system. Keep the battery vent hose

attached at all times.

Park the booster vehicle close to the trunk of your disabled vehicle

making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both

vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.

4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before

you attach the battery cables. Ensure the vent caps are tight and level.

5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical

surges. Turn all other accessories off.

Connecting the jumper cables

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of

the discharged battery.

Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the

assisting (boosting) battery.

–

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

241

2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)

terminal of the assisting battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the

assisting battery.

–

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

242

4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to the spare tire

tie-down stud. (Your vehicle may be equipped with a plastic cap on top

of the tire tie-down stud. This cap must be removed prior to attaching

the cable to the stud.)

Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)

terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an

explosion of the gases that surround the battery.

5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of

both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.

Jump starting

1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at

moderately increased speed.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an

additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.

–

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

243

Removing the jumper cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were

connected.

1. Remove the jumper cable from the spare tire tie-down stud.

2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the

booster vehicle’s battery.

–

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

244

3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster

vehicle’s battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the

disabled vehicle’s battery.

After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables

removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can

relearn its idle conditions.

–

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

245

WRECKER TOWING

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing

service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your

roadside assistance service provider.

It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed

equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not

approved a slingbelt towing procedure.

If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle

damage may occur.

Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow

truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for

proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

246

GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED

At home

You must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized Lincoln

Mercury dealer for warranty repairs. While any Ford, Lincoln or Mercury

dealership handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we

recommend you return to your selling dealer who wants to ensure your

continued satisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require

special training and/or equipment, so not all dealers are authorized to

perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the

warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another

dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after

taking your vehicle to the dealership. Repairs will be made using Ford or

Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by

Ford.

If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you

are receiving, follow these steps:

1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your

selling/servicing dealership.

2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales

Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.

3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company

policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship

Center at the number below.

Away from home

If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when

your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership

could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the

Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to

help you.

In the United States:

Ford Motor Company

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 6248

Dearborn, MI 48121

1-800-392-3673 (FORD)

(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)

www.customersaskford.com

In Canada:

Customer Relationship Centre

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

247

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

P.O. Box 2000

Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)

www.ford.ca

If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle

needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could

provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford

Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help

you.

In the United States:

Ford Motor Company

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 6248

Dearborn, MI 48121

1-800-521-4140

(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)

www.customersaskford.com

In Canada:

Lincoln Centre

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

P.O. Box 2000

Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4

1-800-387-9333

www.lincolncanada.com

In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the

following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:

•Your telephone number (home and business)

•The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located

•The year and make of your vehicle

•The date of vehicle purchase

•The current odometer reading

•The vehicle identification number (VIN)

If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish

to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).

In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing

before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also

allowed a final repair attempt in some states.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

248

In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the

Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss

Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing

replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This

dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state

created rights or other rights which are independent of the

Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.

FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN

You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by

purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides

the following:

•Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you

purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain

maintenance and wear items).

•Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper

Warranty expires.

You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln

Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in

various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored

to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement

benefits for towing and rental coverage.

When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection throughout

the United States and Canada, provided by a network of more than 5,000

participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers.

If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the

time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this

information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete

details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the

Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.

THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)

The Dispute Settlement Board is:

•an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.

•available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company

vehicles.

The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford

Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify

procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without

incurring obligations per applicable state law.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

249

What kinds of cases does the Board review?

Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as

on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light

trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle

warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:

•a non-Ford product

•a non-Ford dealership

•sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated

with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as

designed

•a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a

service or product concern is being reviewed

•items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including

maintenance and wear items)

•alleged personal injury/property damage claims

•cases currently in litigation

•vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes

(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to

review commercial vehicles)

•vehicles with non-U.S. warranties

Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty

has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility

is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.

Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique

brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin

purchasers/lessees.

Board membership

The Board consists of:

•Three consumer representatives

•A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative

Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by

an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen

from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for

their business leadership qualities.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

250

What the Board needs

To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the

DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application

form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return

receipt requested.

Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you

will receive an acknowledgment indicating:

•The file number assigned to your application.

•The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.

Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be

asked to submit statements.

To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:

•Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders

relevant to the case.

•The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed

on your vehicle ownership license.

•The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).

•The current mileage.

•The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.

•A brief description of your unresolved concern.

•A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor

Company.

•The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the

dealership(s).

•A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.

You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not

qualify for Board review.

Oral presentations

If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question

6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation

before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the

case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation

may be requested by the Board as well.

Making a decision

Board members review all available information related to each

complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial

decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

251

Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that

all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board

generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to

consider some cases.

After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a

form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of

the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but

not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to

them under state or federal law.

To request a DSB Brochure/Application

For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call the Board

at the following address/phone number:

Dispute Settlement Board

P.O. Box 1424

Waukesha, WI 53187–1424

1–800–428–3718

You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center

at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952

or by writing to the Center at the following address:

Ford Motor Company

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 6248

Dearborn, Michigan 48121

UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM

(CANADA ONLY)

In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and

the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been

unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party

mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor

Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy

alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a

settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is

designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal

proceedings.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct

hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal

environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

252

parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve

disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s

award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.

CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more

information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial

Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.

GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA

Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the

appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you

of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.

If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock

index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or

owner relations/customer relationship office.

The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may

damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause

engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of

Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper

fuel.

In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty

importing your vehicle back into the U.S.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in

Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the

nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY

WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS

1555 Fairlane Drive

Fairlane Business Park #3

Allen Park, Michigan 48101

U.S.A.

Telephone: (313) 594-4857

FAX: (313) 390-0804

If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford

dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct

you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.

If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of

the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and

new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market

Operations.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

253

ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE

To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:

HELM, INCORPORATED

P.O. Box 07150

Detroit, Michigan 48207

Or call:

For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356

Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:

www.helminc.com.

(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or

money order.)

Obtaining a French owner’s guide

French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box

1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer

or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the

vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of

attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the

vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and

reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or

payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer

use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund

or replacement vehicle.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer

has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its

applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership

of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs

first:

1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity

likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

254

2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a

defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of

the vehicle) OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of

more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the

manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the

following address:

Ford Motor Company

16800 Executive Plaza Drive

Mail Drop 3NE-B

Dearborn, MI 48126

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and

if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a

recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor

Company.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free

at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write

to:

NHTSA

400 Seventh Street

U.S. Department of Transportation

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

the Hotline.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Customer Assistance

255

WASHING THE EXTERIOR

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral

Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available

from your dealer.

•Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing

or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted

surfaces.

•Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch”or during exposure to

strong, direct sunlight.

•Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for

best results.

•Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to

eliminate water spotting.

•It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the

winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause

damage to the vehicle.

•Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings

and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s

paintwork and trim over time.

•Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a

car wash.

•Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted

surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,

wash off as soon as possible.

WAXING

Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will

assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.

•Wash the vehicle first.

•Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.

•Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body

(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof

racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl

area. The paint sealant will “gray”or stain the parts over time.

PAINT CHIPS

Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.

Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to

your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Cleaning

256

•Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar

spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.

•Always read the instructions before using the products.

ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS

Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint

finish. In order to maintain their shine:

•Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),

which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust

accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly

with a strong stream of water.

•Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or

covers.

•Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your

wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning

chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust

and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.

•Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel

cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.

•To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover

(ZC-42), available from your dealer.

ENGINE

Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt

buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:

•Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The

high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause

damage.

•Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the

engine block or other engine components.

•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts

that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.

•Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning

the engine.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Cleaning

257

•3.0L DOHC V6 engine

•3.9L-4V V8 engine

•Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the

running engine may cause internal damage.

PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS

Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are

available from your dealer.

•For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Cleaning

258

•If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar

Remover (ZC-42).

WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES

The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be

cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the

vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include

hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other

organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:

•The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with

a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass

Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.

•Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.

•Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.

•Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or

windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they

appear worn or do not function properly.

Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the

inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause

damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS

Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.

•Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of

the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the

driver from undesirable windshield reflection.

Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning

the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of

the air bag system.

•Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in

contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan

lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted

surfaces.

INTERIOR TRIM

•Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping

with a dry, soft, clean cloth.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Cleaning

259

•Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the

finish.

INTERIOR

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side

air bags:

•Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

•Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Extra Strength

Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-41).

•If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first

with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).

•Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.

•Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can

stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of

the seat materials.

Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s

safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.

Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning

the seat-mounted side air bag. Such products could contaminate

the side air bag system and affect performance of the side air bag in a

collision.

LEATHER SEATS

Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the

leather.

•To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl

Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.

•To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe

Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.

•Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or

cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based

leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of

the clear, protective coating.

Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet

clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the

leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Cleaning

260

UNDERBODY

Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and

door drain holes free from packed dirt.

FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS

Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available

to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products

have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they

are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your

vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or

exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products

or products of equivalent quality:

Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)

Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (not available in Canada) (ZC-40–A)

Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)

Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)

Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)

(ZC-11–A)

Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)

Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)

(ZC-41)

Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)

Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)

Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)

Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)

Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate (F2SZ-19523–WC)

Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)

Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)

Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)

Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)

Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)

Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)

(ZC-23)

Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Cleaning

261

SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS

To help you service your vehicle:

•We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy

location.

•We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking

routine service easy.

If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide

the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner

Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts

conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to

provide the best performance in your vehicle.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE

•Do not work on a hot engine.

•Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.

•Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed

space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.

•Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and

all fuel related parts.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

262

Working with the engine off

1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P

(Park).

2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.

3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.

Working with the engine on

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).

2. Block the wheels.

Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not

remove it while the engine is running.

OPENING THE HOOD

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood

release handle located at the bottom

left of the instrument panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and

release the auxiliary latch that is

located under the front center of

the hood by pushing upward on the

handle.

3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

263

IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

3.0L DOHC V6 engine

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Air filter assembly

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

8. Power distribution box

1234

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

264

3.9L–4V V8 engine

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Air filter assembly

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

8. Power distribution box

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

265

WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the

level is low. In very cold weather, do

not fill the reservoir completely.

Only use a washer fluid that meets

Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.

Refer to Lubricant specifications

in this chapter.

State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the

use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.

Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the

vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.

If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (4.5°C),

use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use

washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in

impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.

Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer

fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system

components.

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil

Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals

for checking the engine oil.

1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the

oil pan.

3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P

(Park).

4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

266

5. Locate and carefully remove the

engine oil level indicator (dipstick).

6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it

again.

•If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is

acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.

•If the oil level is below the MIN

mark, add enough oil to raise the

level within the MIN-MAX range.

•Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil

must be removed from the engine by a service technician.

7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.

Adding engine oil

1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine

oil in this chapter.

2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified

engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap

and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

267

3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the

MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).

4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.

5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise

tightly until clicks are heard, or until it is snug.

To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the

engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

Engine oil and filter recommendations

Look for this certification

trademark.

Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines”by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). To protect your engine’s warranty use

Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford

specification WSS-M2C153-H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel

economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for

your vehicle’s engine.

Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine

treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that

is not covered by Ford warranty.

Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in

the scheduled maintenance guide.

Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for

added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used

that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up

engine noises of knock may be experienced.

It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or

another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

268

BATTERY

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Motorcraft maintenance-free battery

which is located in the luggage

compartment, next to the spare tire.

Your battery is designed to purge any battery gases to the outside of the

vehicle by means of a vent hose. This vent hose MUST be attached at all

times. Replacement batteries must be of the same vented design.

If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled

after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.

Your battery normally does not require additional water during its life of

service. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery

clean and dry. Make certain that the vent hose is attached. Also, make

certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery

terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables

from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the

acid with a solution of baking soda and water.

Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to

the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect

battery performance and durability.

Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause

personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted

substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,

always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper

ventilation.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the

end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,

resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.

Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite

corners.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

269

Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric

acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes

when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of

acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush

immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt

medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,

some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When

the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must

relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and

performance. To begin this process:

1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.

2. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start

the engine.

3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.

5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.

6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.

•The vehicle may need to be driven to relearn the idle and fuel trim

strategy.

•If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle

quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle

trim is eventually relearned.

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the

transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the

transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and

will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the

adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its

optimum shift feel.

If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,

the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is

reconnected.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

270

•Always dispose of automotive

batteries in a responsible manner.

Follow your local authorized

standards for disposal. Call your

local authorized recycling center

to find out more about recycling

automotive batteries.

ENGINE COOLANT

Checking engine coolant

The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the

mileage intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. The

coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled

water, which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant

concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester

(such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The

level of coolant should be maintained at the “FULL COLD”level or

within the “COLD FILL RANGE”in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls

below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant

section.

Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water

concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above

60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A

50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:

•Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).

•Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

•Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.

•Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.

LEAD

RETURN

RECYCLE

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

271

When the engine is cold, check the

level of the engine coolant in the

reservoir.

•The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD”level or within the

“COLD FILL RANGE”as listed on the engine coolant reservoir

(depending upon application).

•Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval

schedules.

•Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your

vehicle in this chapter.

If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,

the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is

low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding

engine coolant in this chapter.

Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine

coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified

function and vehicle location.

COLD FILL

LEVEL

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

272

Adding engine coolant

When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant

and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the

engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.

Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and

scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you

badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.

Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid

container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could

make it difficult to see through the windshield.

•Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant

(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA and OR), VC-7–B

(CA and OR only), meeting Ford Specification

WSS-M97B51–A1.

Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may

darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from

yellow to golden tan.

•Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such

as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or

CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D

with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange

Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your

factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.

•A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case

of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the

cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of

engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone

(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,

overheating or freezing.

•Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants

mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol

and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or

freezing.

•Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These

can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine

coolant.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

273

For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap

on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery

reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and

water to the “FULL COLD”level. For all other vehicles, which have a

coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to

remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with

an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.

To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is

cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The

cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out

forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.

1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.

2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant

pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).

Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.

3. Step back while the pressure releases.

4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the

cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.

5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see

above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE”or the “FULL COLD”level on

the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill

the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.

6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly

installed to prevent coolant loss.)

After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer

to Checking engine coolant. If the concentration is not 50/50

(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the

concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50

coolant concentration.

Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant

reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If

necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and

distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.

If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per

month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling

system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant

can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

274

Recycled engine coolant

Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine

coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold

Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet

available.

Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate

manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling

and disposing of automotive fluids.

Coolant refill capacity

To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer

to Refill capacities in this section.

Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant

in this section.

Severe climates

If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36°C[–34°F]):

•It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration

above 50%.

•NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.

•Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will

decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine

coolant and may cause engine damage.

•Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the

coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate

freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the

winter months.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:

•It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration

above 40%.

•NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.

•Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will

decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine

coolant and may cause engine damage.

•Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will

decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine

coolant and may cause engine damage.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

275

•Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the

coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate

protection at the temperatures in which you drive.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50

mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system

and engine protection.

What you should know about fail-safe cooling

If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to

be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.

The “fail-safe”distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load

and terrain.

How fail-safe cooling works

If the engine begins to overheat:

•The engine coolant temperature

gauge will move to the H (hot)

area.

•The symbol will

illuminate.

•The symbol will illuminate.

If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine

will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled

cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.

When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:

•The engine power will be limited.

•The air conditioning system will be disabled.

Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine

will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to

increase.

Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take

your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine

damage.

When fail-safe mode is activated

You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the

vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

276

operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is

capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine

damage, therefore:

1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.

2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.

3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is

running or hot.

5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.

Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem

increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a

service facility as soon as possible.

WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS

Important safety precautions

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank

may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is

venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops

before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may

spray out and injure you or others.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or

vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause

the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible

personal injury.

Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or

mishandled.

Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

277

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

•Extinguish all smoking materials

and any open flames before

fueling your vehicle.

•Always turn off the vehicle before

fueling.

•Automotive fuels can be harmful

or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if

swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,

call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately

apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.

•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind

can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,

excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious

illness and permanent injury.

•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,

remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and

seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could

lead to permanent injury.

•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is

splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated

clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or

prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.

•Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse”or other forms of

disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,

or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive

individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is

splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and

water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse

reaction.

When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow

sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while

refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.

Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.

The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static

electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an

ungrounded fuel container.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

278

Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an

ungrounded fuel container:

•Place approved fuel container on the ground.

•DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the

cargo area).

•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while

filling.

•DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill

position.

Fuel Filler Cap

Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off

feature.

When fueling your vehicle:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it

stops.

3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.

4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the

filler pipe.

5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.

If the “Check Fuel Cap”indicator comes on and stays on after you start

the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the

engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.

If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler

cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may

be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the

correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.

The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is

venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops

before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may

spray out and injure you or others.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or

vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause

the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible

personal injury.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

279

Choosing the right fuel

Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law

and could damage your vehicle.

Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic

compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that

these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to

deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally

contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using

regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but

fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel

dealer.

Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system

components.

Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was

not designed may not be covered by your warranty.

Octane recommendations

Your vehicle is designed to use

“Premium”unleaded gasoline with

an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 91 or

higher for optimum performance.

The use of gasolines with lower

octane ratings may degrade performance. We do not recommend the use

of gasolines labeled as “Premium”in high altitude areas that are sold

with octane ratings of less than 91.

Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if

it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel

with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified

service technician to prevent any engine damage.

Fuel quality

If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability

problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Premium”

unleaded gasoline. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified

service technician.

It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel

tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane

rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.

Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your

fuel may not be covered by your warranty.

(R+M)/2 METHOD

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

280

Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter

that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved

performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.

Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when

available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the

World-wide Fuel Charter.

Cleaner air

Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning”gasolines to

improve air quality.

Running out of fuel

Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse

affect on powertrain components.

If you have run out of fuel:

•You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after

refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to

the engine.

•Your “Check Engine”indicator may come on. For more information on

the “Check Engine”indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster

chapter.

Fuel Filter

For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service

technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate

intervals for changing the fuel filter.

Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The

customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system

if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.

ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY

Measuring techniques

Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the

driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as

possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are

NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend

taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,600 km (1,000

miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate

measurement after 3,000 km–5,000 km (2,000 miles-3,000 miles).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

281

Filling the tank

The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to

the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities

section of this chapter.

The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the

empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the

amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates

empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.

The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should

not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your

vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be

able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the

fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.

For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:

•Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,

an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.

•Use the same filling rate setting (low —medium —high) each time

the tank is filled.

•Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.

•Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.

•Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.

•Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the

same direction each time you fill up.

•Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.

Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.

Calculating fuel economy

1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading

(in kilometers or miles).

2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters

or gallons).

3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record

the current odometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer

reading.

5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel

economy:

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

282

Calculation 1: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total

kilometers traveled.

Calculation 2: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.

Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city

or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel

economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records

during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel

economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.

Driving style —good driving and fuel economy habits

Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change

a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.

Habits

•Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.

•Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel

economy.

•Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste

fuel.

•Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.

•Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.

•Slow down gradually.

•Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15%

less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]).

•Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.

•Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.

•You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if

unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.

Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel

economy.

•Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may

reduce fuel economy.

•Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel

economy.

•Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.

Maintenance

•Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

283

•Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel

economy.

•Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in

this chapter.

•Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the

recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks

found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.

Conditions

•Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed.

•Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately

0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried).

•Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug

deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may

reduce fuel economy.

•Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.

•Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first

12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving.

•Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to

driving on hilly terrain.

•Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top

cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.

•Close windows for high speed driving.

EPA window sticker

Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your

dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA

window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons

with other vehicles.

It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window

sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG)

expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy

may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a

catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with

applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic

converter and other emission control components continue to work

properly:

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

284

•Use only the specified fuel listed.

•Avoid running out of fuel.

•Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at

high speeds.

•Have the items listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide

performed according to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance

Guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its

emissions system.

If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for

maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting

emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine

Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry

ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine

compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Illumination of the “Check Engine”light, charging system warning light

or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or

loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is

not working properly.

Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially

lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By

law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,

sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not

permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent

it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on

the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the

engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up

specifications.

Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty

information.

On board diagnostics (OBD-II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s

emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

285

Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the

environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet

government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the

service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check

engine/Service engine soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has

detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check

engine/Service engine soon light to illuminate. Examples are:

1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run

poorly.)

2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.

3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened.

These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank

with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three

driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions

present, the Check engine/Service engine soon light should turn off. (A

driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed

city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.

If the Check engine/Service engine soon light remains on, have your

vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of

the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check engine/Service engine

soon light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and

chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not

pass the I/M test with the Check engine/Service engine soon light on.

If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,

the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”

condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a

minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as

described below:

•First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.

•Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with

at least four idle periods.

Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the

engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The

engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,

do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

286

POWER STEERING FLUID

Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval

schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCON威ATF.

1. Start the engine and let it run

until it reaches normal operating

temperature (the engine coolant

temperature gauge indicator will be

near the center of the normal area

between H and C).

2. While the engine idles, turn the

steering wheel left and right several

times.

3. Turn the engine off.

4. Check the fluid level in the

reservoir. It should be between the

MIN and MAX lines. Do not add

fluid if the level is in this range.

5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in

small amounts, continuously

checking the level until it reaches

the range between the MIN and

MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap

back on the reservoir.

BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR

The fluid level will drop slowly as

the brakes wear, and will rise when

the brake components are replaced.

Fluid levels between the “MIN”and

“MAX”lines are within the normal

operating range; there is no need to

add fluid. If the fluid levels are

outside of the normal operating range the performance of your brake

system could be compromised; seek service from your dealer

immediately.

TRANSMISSION FLUID

Checking automatic transmission fluid

The 5R55S transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

287

Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for scheduled intervals for

fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.

However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not

working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you

notice some sign of fluid leakage.

Transmission fluid should be checked and, if required, fluid

should be added by a qualified technician.

Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. Use only

MERCON威V automatic transmission fluid. The type of fluid used is

indicated on the transmission fluid pan, extension housing and also in

the Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.

Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause

internal transmission component damage and void the warranty.

Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or

cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission

operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.

AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE

Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals

for changing the air filter element.

When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter

element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.

Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not

remove it while the engine is running.

Changing the air filter element

1. Loosen the hose clamp on the

outlet tube at the air filter housing.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

288

2. Release the two clamps that

secure the cover to the air filter

housing and place the cover aside.

3. Remove the air filter element

from the air filter housing.

4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or

debris and to ensure good sealing.

5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter

element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause

filter damage and allow unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly

seated.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

289

6. Replace the air filter housing

cover and secure the clamps. Be

sure all of the tabs on front edge are

correctly aligned as shown.

Note: If you encounter any difficulty in replacing your air filter element,

have your vehicle serviced at your local dealer.

INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

New vehicles are fitted with tires

that have a rating on them called

Tire Quality Grades. The Quality

grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For

example:

•Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United

States Department of Transportation has set.

Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger

cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,

space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim

diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in

Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

290

U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.

Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following

information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The

grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include

acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A B C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by

law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

291

TIRES

Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they

must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.

Glossary of tire terminology

•Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,

recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle

can carry.

•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of

each tire providing information about the tire brand and

manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.

•Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.

•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a

maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing

the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s

load carrying capability.

•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a

heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase

the tire’s load carrying capability.

•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.

•B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the

front door.

•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.

•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.

•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that

contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.

•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly

upon which the tire beads are seated.

INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL

Federal law requires tire manufacturer’s to place standardized

information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and

describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and

in case of a recall.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

292

Information on “P”type tires

P215/65R15 95H is an example of a

tire size, load index and speed

rating. The definitions of these

items are listed below. (Note that

the tire size, load index and speed

rating for your vehicle may be

different from this example.)

1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by

the Tire and Rim Association

(T&RA), that may be used for

service on cars, SUVs, minivans and

light trucks.

Note: If your tire size does not

begin with a letter this may mean it

is designated by either ETRTO

(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire

Manufacturing Association).

2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from

sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the

wider the tire.

3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to

width.

4. R: Indicates a “radial”type tire.

5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your

wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel

diameter.

6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how

much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your

owner’s guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.

Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not

required by federal law.

7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the

speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of

time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires

on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation

pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference

in conditions. The ratings range from 99 mph (159 km/h) to 186 mph

(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

293

Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not

required by federal law.

Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)

Q 99 mph (159 km/h)

R 106 mph (171 km/h)

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

U 124 mph (200 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (299 km/h)

Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240

km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with

a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire

manufacturers always use the letters ZR.

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the

letters “DOT”and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The

next two numbers or letters are the plant code for where it was

manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four

numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,

the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers

go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The

numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This

information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.

9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow. or

AT: All Terrain. or

AS: All Season.

10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of

plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and

sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the

tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

294

11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and

pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the tire label or the

safety certification label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of

the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle

12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

•Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1

⁄

) times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100.

•Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,

and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement

as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

•Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Tire manufacturer’s

maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the

maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally

higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure

which can be found on either the tire label or certification label which is

located B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation

pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on

the vehicle label.

The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such

as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

295

Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT”type

tires

“LT”type tires have some additional

information beyond those of “P”

type tires; these differences are

described below:

1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by

the Tire and Rim Association

(T&RA), that is intended for service

on light trucks.

2. Load Range/Load Inflation

Limits: Indicates the tire’s

load-carrying capabilities and its

inflation limits.

3. Maximum Load Dual lbs. (kg)

at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the

maximum load and tire pressure

when the tire is used as a dual;

defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the

vehicle).

4. Maximum Load Single lbs. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the

maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;

defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

296

Information on “T”type tires

T145/80D16 is an example of a tire

size.

Note: The temporary tire size for

your vehicle may be different from

this example.

1. T: Indicates a type of tire,

designated by the Tire and Rim

Association (T&RA), that is

intended for temporary service on

cars, SUVs, minivans and light

trucks.

2. 145: Indicates the nominal width

of the tire in millimeters from

sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In

general, the larger the number, the

wider the tire.

3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio

which gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower

indicate a short sidewall.

4. D: Indicates a “diagonal”type tire.

R: Indicates a “radial”type tire.

5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your

wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel

diameter.

Location of the tire label

You will find a tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and

other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the

driver’s door.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

297

TIRE CARE

Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear

abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:

Inflating your tires

Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare,

at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a

reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be

inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire

pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.

Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire

performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause

uneven treadwear patterns.

Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and

may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,

with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.

Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,

resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may

result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control

and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not

appear to be flat!

When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also

change. A 10°F(6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding

drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures

frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found

on the tire label or certification label.

If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more

than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed”or reduce air pressure. The tires are

hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above

recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold

inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.

To check the pressure in your tire(s):

1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving

even a mile.

Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check

and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure

when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air

pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed”or reduce air

pressure when tires are hot.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

298

2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire

gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure

Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in

the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.

4. Replace the valve cap.

5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.

Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other

tires. Check the tire label on the B pillar or the edge of the driver’s door

for the recommended spare tire pressure.

6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other

objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air

leak.

7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.

Tire and wheel alignment

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your

vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your

vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be

out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Ford or

Lincoln/Mercury dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.

Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid

treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician

at a Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles

and those with an independent rear suspension require alignment of all

four wheels.

The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and

wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.

Tire rotation

Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the

Scheduled Maintenance Guide that comes with your vehicle) will help

your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and

longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

299

•Front Wheel Drive (FWD)

vehicles (front tires at top of

diagram)

•Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)

vehicles/Four Wheel Drive (4WD)

vehicles (front tires at top of

diagram)

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

300

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a

Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealership to check for and correct any wheel

misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire

rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A

dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is

different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If

you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use

only and should not be used in a tire rotation.

Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked

and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.

Tire wear

Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.

Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip

the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your

tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually

smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.

When the tread is worn down to

1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must

be replaced to prevent your vehicle

from skidding and hydroplaning.

Built-in treadwear indicators, or

“wear bars”, which look like narrow

strips of smooth rubber across the

tread will appear on the tire when

the tread is worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm). When you see these

“wear bars”, the tire is worn out and should be replaced.

Inspect your tires frequently for any of the following conditions and

replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:

•Fabric showing through the tire rubber

•Bulges in the tread or sidewalls

•Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls

•Cracks in the tread groove

•Impact damage resulting from use

•Separation in the tread

•Separation in the sidewall

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

301

•Severe abrasion on the sidewall

If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare

tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be

replaced.

Tire Replacement Requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide safe ride and

handling capability.

Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size

and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus

all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or

wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and

performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of

loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause

steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If

you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford

or Lincoln/Mercury dealer.

Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,

tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it

can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result

in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury and death.

You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires

due to the aging of the spare tire.

Safety practices

Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.

•Observe posted speed limits

•Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

•Avoid potholes and objects on the road

•Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking

If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly spin the

tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire

can explode in as little as three to five seconds.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

302

Tire explosions can cause death, personal injury or property

damage. Do not allow anyone to stand near, directly ahead or

behind the spinning tire.

Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point

indicated on the speedometer.

Highway hazards

No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you

may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the

closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but

your safety is more important.

If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you

suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your

speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and

inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,

deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If

you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair

facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS

Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you

currently have on your vehicle.

The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in

rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow

tires or chains.

Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:

•Use only SAE Class S chains with P225/55R16 tires.

•Do not use tire chains with size P235/50R17 tires. Use of SAE Class S

chains or other chain types may damage your vehicle.

•Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any

wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.

•Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your

vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove

the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.

•If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

303

•Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use

tire chains on dry roads.

•The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle

damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when

using snow tires or chains.

MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS

Component 3.0L-4V V6 engine 3.9L-4V V8 engine

Air filter element FA-1679 FA-1679

Fuel filter FG-1011 FG-1011

Battery (standard) BXT-66-650 BXT-66-650

Battery (optional) BXT-66-750 BXT-66-750

Oil filter FL-400S FL-218

PCV valve

Spark plugs

The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items

listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide and is essential to the life

and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.

For PCV valve replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service

technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the

appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve.

Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and

design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or

equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void

for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not

used.

For spark plug replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service

technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the

appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.

Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and

design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or

equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be

void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not

used.

Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark

plug gap information.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

304

REFILL CAPACITIES

Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity

Brake fluid Motorcraft High

Performance DOT

3 Motor Vehicle

Brake Fluid

All Fill to MAX line

on reservoir

Engine oil

(includes filter

change)

Motorcraft SAE

5W-20 Premium

Synthetic Blend

Motor Oil (US)

Motorcraft SAE

5W-20 Super

Premium Motor Oil

(Canada)

3.0L-4V V6

engine

6.5L (6.9

quarts)

3.9L-4V V8

engine

6.2L (6.5

quarts)

Engine coolant

Motorcraft

Premium Gold

Engine Coolant

(yellow-colored)

3.0L-4V V6

engine

10.6L (11.2

quarts)

3.9L-4V V8

engine

11.3L (11.9

quarts)

Power steering

fluid

Motorcraft

MERCON威ATF

All Fill to MAX line

on reservoir

Rear axle

Motorcraft SAE

75W-90 Fuel

Efficient High

Performance

Synthetic Rear

Axle Lubricant

All 1.2-1.3L

(2.5-2.7 pints)

Fuel tank N/A All 68.2L (18.0

gallons)

Transmission

fluid

Motorcraft

MERCON威VATF

Automatic

(5R55S)

11.2L (11.9

quarts)

Windshield

washer fluid

Motorcraft

Premium

Windshield Washer

Concentrate

All Fill to line on

reservoir

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

305

Use only brake fluids certified to meet Ford specifications. Refer to

Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. DOT 3 fluid is recommended.

However, if DOT 3 is not available, DOT 4 fluid can be used.

Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.

Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and

is considered lubricated for life. These lubricants do not need to be

checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the

axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should

be changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water. Fill 6

mm to 14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below bottom of fill hole.

Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCON威and

MERCON威V are not interchangeable. DO NOT MIX MERCON威and

MERCON威V. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine

the correct service interval.

Approximate dry capacity, includes cooler and tubes. Fluid level should

be checked by a qualified service technician.

Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine

oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification

WSS-M2C153–H and the API Certification mark.

LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS

Item Ford part name Ford part

number

Ford

specification

Brake fluid Motorcraft High

Performance DOT 3

Motor Vehicle

Brake Fluid

PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A

and DOT 3

Door

weatherstrips

Silicone Lubricant XL-6 ESR-M13P4-A

Door latch,

hood latch,

auxiliary hood

latch, door

hinges, striker

plates, seat

tracks and fuel

filler door hinge

Multi-Purpose

Grease

XG-4 or XL-5 ESR-M1C159-A

ESB-M1C93–B

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

306

Item Ford part name Ford part

number

Ford

specification

Engine coolant Motorcraft

Premium Gold

Engine Coolant

(yellow-colored)

VC-7-A (U.S.,

except CA and

OR), VC-7-B (CA

and OR only)

WSS-M97B51–A1

Engine oil (all

engines)

Motorcraft SAE

5W-20 Premium

Synthetic Blend

Motor Oil (US)

Motorcraft SAE

5W-20 Super

Premium Motor Oil

(Canada)

XO-5W20-QSP

(US)

CXO-5W20–LSP12

(Canada)

WSS-M2C153-H

with API

Certification

Mark

Lock cylinders Motorcraft

Penetrating and

Lock Lubricant

Motorcraft XL-1 none

Power steering

fluid

Motorcraft

MERCON威ATF

XT-2-QDX MERCON威

Rear Axle

Lubricant

Motorcraft SAE

75W-90 Fuel

Efficient High

Performance

Synthetic Rear Axle

Lubricant

XY-75W90-QFEHP

Automatic

transmission

fluid

Motorcraft

MERCON威VATF

XT-5-QM MERCON威V

Windshield

washer fluid

Premium

Windshield Washer

Concentrate

ZC-32-A WSB-M8B16–A2

Use only brake fluids certified to meet Ford specifications. DOT 3 fluid

is recommended. However, if DOT 3 is not available, DOT 4 fluid can be

used.

Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does not

require changing unless the axle has been submerged in water.

Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCON威and

MERCON威V are not interchangeable. DO NOT MIX MERCON威and

MERCON威V. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine

the correct service interval.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

307

ENGINE DATA

Engine 3.0L-4V V6 engine 3.9L-4V V8 engine

Displacement 2 968 cc (181 cid) 3 949 cc (241 cid)

Required fuel 91 octane 91 octane

Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug

Compression ratio 10.5:1 10.75:1

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS

Vehicle dimensions Inches (mm)

(1) Overall length 193.9 (4925)

(2) Overall width 73.2 (1859)

(3) Overall height 56.0 (1424)

(4) Wheelbase 114.5 (2909)

(5) Tread - Front 60.6 (1540)

(5) Tread - Rear 60.7 (1543)

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

308

IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

The vehicle identification number is

attached to a metal tag and is

located on the driver side

instrument panel. (Please note that

in the graphic XXXX is

representative of your vehicle

identification number.)

1. World manufacturer identifier

2. Brake type and gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR)

3. Vehicle line, series, body type

4. Engine type

5. Check digit

6. Model year

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

309

7. Assembly plant

8. Production sequence number

Engine number

The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification

number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and

transfer case (if equipped).

Transmission/Transaxle code designations

You can find a transmission/transaxle code on the vehicle certification

label. The following table tells you which transmission or transaxle each

code represents.

Truck application:

Code Transmission Description

Manual transmission

M Manual 5–speed (AKK))

C Manual 5–speed overdrive (Close ratio)

W Manual 5–speed overdrive (Dana ZF)

G Manual 6–speed ZF

Automatic transmission

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

310

Code Transmission Description

Y Automatic 4–speed overdrive (CD4E)

U Automatic 4–speed overdrive (4R70W)

T Automatic 4–speed overdrive (4R44E)

E Automatic 4–speed overdrive (4R100)

J Automatic 5–speed overdrive (5R55E)

Electric

H One speed electric

D Automatic 5–speed overdrive (5R44E)

R Automatic 5–speed overdrive (5R55S)

Passenger car application:

Code Transmission/Transaxle Description

Front wheel drive manual transaxle

R5–speed overdrive (MTX75)

W5–speed overdrive (M5)

Front wheel drive automatic transaxle

A4–speed overdrive (4F27E)

E4–speed overdrive (4FE)

J3–speed (Mazda)

L4–speed overdrive (AX4S)

P4–speed overdrive (4F20E)

X4–speed overdrive (4F50N)

Y4–speed overdrive (CD4E)

Rear wheel drive manual transaxle

55–speed (Mazda M5)

Rear wheel drive automatic transmission

U4–speed overdrive (4R70W)

A5–speed overdrive (5R55N)

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

311

LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE

A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your

vehicle through your local authorized Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer.

These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your

automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style

and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory

is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s

rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will

repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln Accessory

found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship

during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the

defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever

provides you the greatest benefit:

•12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or

•the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.

This means that Genuine Lincoln Accessories purchased along with your

new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of

your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty —4 years or 50,000 miles (80,000

km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy

of the warranty.

Not all accessories are available for all models.

Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessory products. Not all

accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are

available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online

store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.

Exterior style

Bug shields

Deflectors

Exterior trim kits

Front end covers

Grille inserts

Headlamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)

Splash guards

Wheels

Interior style

Cell phone holders

Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Accessories

312

Floor mats

Interior trim kits

Leather wrapped steering wheels

Scuff plates

Speed control

Lifestyle

Bike racks

Cargo organization and management

Engine block heaters and blankets

Peace of mind

Airbag anti-theft locks

First aid and safety kits

Full vehicle covers

Locking gas cap

Navigation systems

Remote start

Vehicle security systems

For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in

mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:

•When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your

vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of

the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety

Compliance Certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight

information.

•The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio

Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile

communications systems —such as two-way radios, telephones and

theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such

equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC

regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service

technician.

•Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your

vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive

use.

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Accessories

313

Accessory delay ........................112

AdvanceTrac ..............................208

Air bag supplemental restraint

system ................177–178, 182, 185

and child safety seats ............179

description ..............178, 182, 185

disposal ....................................189

driver air bag ..........180, 183, 187

indicator light .........181, 184, 188

operation .................180, 183, 187

passenger air bag ...180, 183, 187

side air bag ......................182, 185

Air cleaner filter ...............288, 304

Air conditioning ....................90, 92

Antifreeze

(see Engine coolant) ................271

Anti-lock brake system

(see Brakes) ......................204–205

Anti-theft system ......................155

arming the system ..................156

disarming a triggered

system .....................................156

Audio system (see Radio) ...17, 21

Automatic transmission

driving an automatic

overdrive .................................211

fluid, adding ............................287

fluid, checking ........................287

fluid, refill capacities ..............305

fluid, specification ..................308

Axle

lubricant specifications ..306, 308

refill capacities ........................305

Battery .......................................269

acid, treating emergencies .....269

jumping a disabled battery ....240

maintenance-free ....................269

replacement, specifications ...304

servicing ..................................269

BeltMinder .................................173

Brakes ........................................204

anti-lock ...........................204–205

anti-lock brake system (ABS)

warning light ...........................205

fluid, checking and adding ....287

fluid, refill capacities ..............305

fluid, specifications .........306, 308

lubricant specifications ..306, 308

parking ....................................205

shift interlock ..........................210

Bulbs ..........................................102

Capacities for refilling fluids ....305

Cargo net ...................................141

Cell phone use ..........................126

Changing a tire .........................235

Child safety restraints ..............190

child safety belts ....................190

Child safety seats ......................192

attaching with tether straps ..196

in front seat ............................194

in rear seat ..............................194

Cleaning your vehicle

engine compartment ..............257

instrument panel ....................259

interior .....................................260

interior trim ............................259

plastic parts ............................258

washing ....................................256

waxing .....................................256

wheels ......................................257

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Index

314

wiper blades ............................259

Climate control (see Air

conditioning or Heating) ......90, 92

Clock adjust

6-CD in dash .............................19

AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................23

Compass, electronic ..................113

calibration ...............................114

set zone adjustment ...............114

Console ......................................140

overhead ..........................109–110

Controls

power seat ...............................158

steering column ......................119

Coolant

checking and adding ..............271

refill capacities ................275, 305

specifications ..................306, 308

Cruise control

(see Speed control) ..................116

Customer Assistance ................223

Ford accessories for your

vehicle .....................................261

Ford Extended Service

Plan ..........................................249

Getting assistance outside the

U.S. and Canada .....................253

Getting roadside assistance ...223

Getting the service you

need .........................................247

Ordering additional owner’s

literature .................................254

The Dispute Settlement

Board .......................................249

Utilizing the

Mediation/Arbitration

Program ...................................252

Daytime running lamps

(see Lamps) ................................99

Defrost

rear window ..............................97

Dipstick

automatic transmission

fluid ..........................................287

engine oil .................................266

Doors

central unlocking ....................143

lubricant specifications ..........306

Driving under special

conditions ..................................215

through water .........................218

Emergencies, roadside

jump-starting ..........................240

Emergency Flashers .................224

Emission control system ..........284

Engine ........................................308

cleaning ...................................257

coolant .....................................271

fail-safe coolant ......................276

idle speed control ...................269

lubrication

specifications ..................306, 308

refill capacities ........................305

service points ..................264–265

Engine block heater .................204

Engine oil ..................................266

checking and adding ..............266

dipstick ....................................266

filter, specifications ........268, 304

recommendations ...................268

refill capacities ........................305

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Index

315

specifications ..................306, 308

Exhaust fumes ..........................204

Fail safe cooling ........................276

Floor mats .................................140

Fluid capacities .........................305

Foglamps .....................................99

Fuel ............................................277

calculating fuel

economy ..........................129, 281

cap ...........................................279

capacity ...................................305

choosing the right fuel ...........280

comparisons with EPA fuel

economy estimates .................284

detergent in fuel .....................281

filling your vehicle with

fuel ...........................277, 279, 282

filter, specifications ........281, 304

improving fuel economy ........281

octane rating ...................280, 308

quality ......................................280

running out of fuel .................281

safety information relating to

automotive fuels .....................277

Fuses ..................................225–226

Garage Door Opener

(see Homelink wireless control

system) ......................................123

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............279

Gas mileage

(see Fuel economy) .................281

Gauges .........................................15

Hazard flashers .........................224

Head restraints .................157, 162

Headlamps ...................................98

aiming ......................................100

autolamp system .......................98

bulb specifications ..................102

daytime running lights .............99

flash to pass ............................100

replacing bulbs ...............103–104

turning on and off ....................98

Heating

heating and air conditioning

system .................................90, 92

Homelink wireless control

system ........................................123

Hood ..........................................263

Ignition ...............................201, 308

Infant seats

(see Safety seats) .....................192

Inspection/maintenance (I/M)

testing ........................................286

Instrument panel

cleaning ...................................259

cluster ........................................10

lighting up panel and

interior .....................................100

Jack ............................................235

positioning ...............................235

storage .....................................235

Jump-starting your vehicle ......240

Keyless entry system ...............151

autolock ...................................150

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Index

316

Keys ...........................................142

positions of the ignition .........201

valet key ..................................142

Lamps

autolamp system .......................98

bulb replacement

specifications chart ................102

daytime running light ...............99

fog lamps ...................................99

headlamps .................................98

headlamps, flash to pass ........100

instrument panel, dimming ...100

interior lamps .................102–103

replacing bulbs ...............102–106

Lane change indicator

(see Turn signal) ......................101

Lights, warning and indicator ....10

anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........205

Load limits .................................218

Locks

autolock ...................................150

childproof ................................144

doors ........................................142

Lubricant specifications ...306, 308

Lug nuts ....................................240

Luggage rack .............................141

Lumbar support, seats .............158

Message center .................127–128

select button ...........................127

warning messages ...................131

Mirrors ...............................109, 112

automatic dimming rearview

mirror ......................................112

fold away .................................116

heated ......................................115

programmable memory ..........151

side view mirrors (power) .....115

Moon roof ..................................122

Motorcraft parts ................281, 304

Navigation system .......................25

cd functions ..............................43

destination mode ......................67

DVD location .............................89

map mode .................................47

quick start .................................27

radio functions ..........................35

Octane rating ............................280

Oil (see Engine oil) ..................266

Parking brake ............................205

Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....304

Pedals (see Power adjustable

foot pedals) ...............................116

Power adjustable foot pedals ...116

Power distribution box

(see Fuses) .......................229, 232

Power door locks ......................142

Power point ...............................110

Power steering ..................206–207

fluid, checking and adding ....287

fluid, refill capacity ................305

fluid, specifications .........306, 308

Power Windows .........................111

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Index

317

Radio ......................................17, 21

Rear Park Assist .......................216

Rear window defroster ...............97

Relays ........................................225

Remote entry system ...............146

opening the trunk ...................148

Roadside assistance ..................223

Roof rack ...................................141

Safety Belt Maintenance ..........177

Safety belts (see Safety

restraints) ..........164, 167–170, 172

Safety Canopy ...........................182

Safety defects, reporting ..........255

Safety restraints ........164, 167–172

belt minder .............................173

extension assembly ................176

for adults .........................168–170

for children .....................189–190

safety belt maintenance .........177

warning light and chime ........172

Safety seats for children ..........192

Seat belts

(see Safety restraints) .............164

Seats ..........................................157

child safety seats ....................192

climate control ........................161

memory seat ...................151, 160

Select Shift Transmission

(SST) shifter .............................213

Servicing your vehicle ..............262

Setting the clock

AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................19

AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................23

Spark plugs,

specifications .....................304, 308

Specification chart,

lubricants ...........................306, 308

Speed control ............................116

Starting your vehicle ........201–203

jump starting ..........................240

Steering

speed sensitive .......................207

Steering column lock ................109

Steering wheel

controls ....................................119

tilting .......................................108

Tilt steering wheel ....................108

Tires ...........................235, 290–292

alignment ................................299

care ..........................................298

changing ..........................235, 237

checking the pressure ............298

label .........................................297

replacing ..................................302

rotating ....................................299

safety practices .......................302

sidewall information ...............292

snow tires and chains ............303

spare tire .........................235–236

terminology .............................292

tire grades ...............................291

treadwear ........................291, 301

Towing .......................................222

recreational towing .................222

trailer towing ..........................222

wrecker ....................................246

Traction control ........................207

Transmission .............................210

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Index

318

brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....210

fluid, checking and adding

(automatic) .............................287

fluid, refill capacities ..............305

lubricant specifications ..306, 308

Trunk .........................................144

remote release ................138, 148

Turn signal ................................101

Vehicle dimensions ...................308

Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) ..........................................309

Vehicle loading ..........................218

Ventilating your vehicle ...........204

Warning lights (see Lights) .......10

Washer fluid ..............................266

Water, Driving through .............218

Windows

power .......................................111

Windshield washer fluid and

wipers ........................................107

checking and adding fluid .....266

replacing wiper blades ...........107

Wrecker towing .........................246

2004 Lincoln LS (dew)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)

USA English (fus)

Index

319

320

Lincoln 2004 Ls Owners Manual Ford

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation